Manual Icom IC-7000 (page 154 of 166) (English)

12304

154

Zoom out

Zoom in

1/166

HF/VHF/UHF

ALL MODE TRANSCEIVER

i7000

INSTRUCTION MANUAL

i-1

IMPORTANT

READ THIS INSTRUCTION MANUAL

CAREFULLY before attempting to operate the

transceiver.

SAVE THIS INSTRUCTION MANUAL. This

manual contains important safety and operating in-

structions for the IC-7000.

EXPLICIT DEFINITIONS

WORD DEFINITION

WARNING

Personal injury, ﬁre hazard or electric

shock may occur.

CAUTION Equipment damage may occur.

NOTE

If disregarded, inconvenience only. No

risk or personal injury, fire or electric

shock.

We understand that you have a choice of many differ-

ent radios in the market place. We want to take a cou-

ple of moments of your time to thank you for making

the IC-7000 your radio of choice, and hope you agree

with Icom’s philosophy of “technology first.” Many

hours of research and development went into the de-

sign of your IC-7000.

FEATURES

❍ IF DSP features

❍ All mode capability covering 160–2 m and

70 cm (depending on version)

❍ Compact with detachable front panel

❍ ±0.5 ppm of high frequency stability

❍ Baudot RTTY demodulator

❍ Simple band scope function

❍ Selectable SSB transmission passband

width (For both higher and lower pass fre-

quency)

❍ Standard voice synthesizer/voice recorder

The transceiver comes with the following acces-

sories.

Qty.

q Hand microphone (HM-151) ........................ 1

w DC power cable* (OPC-1457) ..................... 1

or (OPC-1457R) ............... 1

e Spare fuse (ATC 5 A) ................................... 1

r Spare fuse (ATC 30 A) ................................. 2

t ACC cable......................................................1

y 3.5 (d) mm plug..............................................1

u 6.5 (d) mm Electronic keyer plug ...................1

i Microphone hanger........................................1

o Ferrite bead**.................................................1

* Depending on versions.

**Not supplied with non-European versions.

For European versions

(see p. 19 for installation details)

FOREWORD SUPPLIED ACCESSORIES

Icom, Icom Inc. and the logo are registered trademarks

of Icom Incorporated (Japan) in the United States, the United

Kingdom, Germany, France, Spain, Russia and/or other

countries.

Spurious signals may be received near the following fre-

quencies. These are created in the internal circuit and does

not indicate a transceiver malfunction:

52.76497 MHz,

443.03535 MHz

THIS P

AGE

OPEN

i-2

SPCH

/LOCK

TUNER

/CALL

XFC

V/M

F-1

F-2

FIL

MODE

GENE

123

456

789

F-INP

ENT

1.8 3.5 7

10 14 18

21 24 28

50 144 430

Mic element

!7!8!9@0@2@3@4 @1

yu !2

!1!0i

⁄0

⁄2

⁄3

⁄1

Front panel

HM-151

The front panel and HM-151’s panel

descriptions are descrived on pages

1 to 4, and on page 9, respectively

(see the Chapter 1 ‘PANEL DE-

SCRIPTION’ for more details).

ILLUSTRATIONS

i-3

■ Front panel

q AF GAIN CONTROL [AF] (inner control; p. 33)

w RF GAIN CONTROL/SQUELCH CONTROL

[RF/SQL] (outer control; p. 35)

e POWER KEY [PWR] (p. 25)

r FRONT PANEL LATCH (p. 16)

t PASSBAND TUNING/M-ch/RIT CONTROLS

[PBT/M-ch/RIT] (pgs. 73, 77, 86, 100, 104)

y TWIN PBT (M-ch/RIT) INDICATOR

(pgs. 73, 77, 86, 100)

u MENU/GROUP KEYS [MENU/GRP] (p. 151)

i TUNER/CALL KEY [TUNER/CALL]

(pgs. 100, 114)

o MULTI-FUNCTION KEYS [F1]/[F2]/[F3]/[F4]

(pgs. 5–8, 151)

!0 MANUAL NOTCH KEY [MNF/ADJ] (p. 81)

!1 AUTO NOTCH/VOICE RECORDER KEY

[ANF/

•

REC] (pgs. 80, 93)

!2 SPCH/LOCK KEY [SPCH/LOCK] (pgs. 34, 37)

!3 MICROPHONE CONNECTOR (p. 10)

UP/DOWN (BAND) KEYS

[Y(

BAND

)]/[

(

BAND

)]

!5 MAIN DIAL TENSION LATCH

!6 HEADPHONE JACK [PHONES] (p. 18)

!7 MAIN DIAL [DIAL]

!8 RECEIVE/TRANSMIT INDICATORS [RX]/[TX]

!9 TUNING STEP KEY [TS] (pgs. 30–32)

@0 NOISE BLANKER KEY [NB/ADJ] (p. 78)

@1 NOISE REDUCTION KEY [NR/LEV] (p. 79)

@2 FUNCTION DISPLAY (p. 13)

@3 PRE AMP/ATTENUATOR KEY [P.AMP/ATT]

(p. 72)

@4 MODE KEY [MODE] (p. 34)

■ Microphone (HM-151)

z SPCH/LOCK KEY [SPCH/LOCK] (p. 34, 37)

x PTT SWITCH [PTT] (p. 37)

c UP/DOWN SWITCHES [

]/[

]

v TRANSMIT INDICATOR (p. 37)

b KEYPAD (pgs. 28, 29)

n FILTER SELECTION [FIL] (p. 75)

m MODE KEY [MODE] (p. 34)

, POWER INDICATOR

. PROGRAMMABLE FUNCTION KEYS [F-1]/[F-2]

⁄0 MEMORY WRITE [MW] (pgs. 101, 102)

⁄1 VFO/MEMORY SELECTION [V/M]

(pgs. 27, 100, 107)

⁄2 TRANSMIT FREQUENCY CHECK [XFC]

(pgs. 65, 89)

⁄3 TUNER/CALL KEY [TUNER/CALL]

(pgs. 100, 114)

R WARNING RF EXPOSURE! This device emits

Radio Frequency (RF) energy. Extreme caution should be

observed when operating this device. If you have any

questions regarding RF exposure and safety standards

please refer to the Federal Communications Commission

Ofﬁce of Engineering and Technology’s report on Evalu-

ating Compliance with FCC Guidelines for Human Radio

Frequency Electromagnetic Fields (OET Bulletin 65).

R WARNING HIGH VOLTAGE! NEVER touch an

antenna or internal antenna connector during transmis-

sion. This may result in an electrical shock or burn.

R WARNING! NEVER operate the transceiver while

driving a vehicle. Safe driving requires your full atten-

tion—anything less may result in an accident.

R NEVER apply AC power to the [DC13.8V] socket on

the transceiver rear panel. This could cause a ﬁre or dam-

age the transceiver.

R NEVER apply more than 16 V DC, such as a 24 V

battery, to the [DC13.8V] socket on the transceiver rear

panel. This could cause a ﬁre or damage the transceiver.

R NEVER let metal, wire or other objects touch any in-

ternal part or connectors on the rear panel of the trans-

ceiver. This may result in an electric shock or this could

cause a ﬁre or damege the transceiver.

R NEVER connect or use the supplied HM-151 (micro-

phone) with other transceiver. This could cause damage

to the transceiver. The HM-151 is designed for use with

the IC-7000 ONLY.

NEVER expose the transceiver to rain, snow or any liq-

uids.

AVOID using or placing the transceiver in areas with tem-

peratures below –10°C (+14°F) or above +60°C (+140°F).

Be aware that temperatures on a vehicle’s dashboard can

exceed +80°C (+176°F), resulting in permanent damage

to the transceiver if left there for extended periods.

AVOID placing the transceiver in excessively dusty envi-

ronments or in direct sunlight.

AVOID placing the transceiver against walls or putting

anything on top of the transceiver. This will obstruct heat

dissipation.

Place unit in a secure place to avoid inadvertent use by

children.

During mobile operation, NEVER place the transceiver

where air bag deployment may be obstructed.

During mobile operation, DO NOT place the transceiver

where hot or cold air blows directly onto it.

During mobile operation, DO NOT operate the transceiver

without running the vehicle’s engine. When the trans-

ceiver’s power is ON and your vehicle’s engine is OFF,

the vehicle’s battery will soon become exhausted.

Make sure the transceiver power is OFF before starting

the vehicle engine. This will avoid possible damage to the

transceiver by ignition voltage spikes.

During maritime mobile operation, keep the transceiver

and microphone as far away as possible from the mag-

netic navigation compass to prevent erroneous indica-

tions.

BE CAREFUL! The rear panel will become hot when op-

erating the transceiver continuously for long periods.

BE CAREFUL! If a linear ampliﬁer is connected, set the

transceiver’s RF output power to less than the linear am-

pliﬁer’s maximum input level, otherwise, the linear ampli-

ﬁer will be damaged.

Use Icom microphones only (supplied or optional). Other

manufacturer’s microphones have different pin assign-

ments, and connection to the IC-7000 may damage the

transceiver.

For U.S.A. only

Caution: Changes or modiﬁcations to this transceiver,

not expressly approved by Icom Inc., could void your

authority to operate this transceiver under FCC regu-

lations.

PRECAUTIONS

iii

IMPORTANT …………………………………………i-1

FOREWORD ………………………………………… i-1

EXPLICIT DEFINITIONS …………………………… i-1

SUPPLIED ACCESSORIES…………………………i-1

ILLUSTRATIONS ……………………………………i-2

■ Front panel ……………………………………… i-3

■ Microphone (HM-151) ………………………… i-3

PRECAUTIONS ………………………………………ii

TABLE OF CONTENTS …………………………… iii

1PANEL DESCRIPTION …………………1–14

■ Front panel ………………………………………… 1

■ Multi-function keys ……………………………… 5

D Menu M-1 functions …………………………… 5

D Menu M-2 functions …………………………… 5

D Menu M-3 functions …………………………… 5

D Menu S-1 functions …………………………… 7

D Menu S-2 functions …………………………… 7

D Menu S-3 functions …………………………… 8

D Menu G-1 (Scope) functions ………………… 8

■ Microphone (HM-151) …………………………… 9

D Microphone connector ……………………… 10

■ Rear panel ……………………………………… 11

D DATA socket…………………………………… 12

D ACC socket …………………………………… 12

■ Function display ………………………………… 13

2 INSTALLATION AND CONNECTIONS 15–24

■ Unpacking ……………………………………… 15

■ Selecting a location……………………………… 15

■ Grounding………………………………………… 15

■ Antennaconnection……………………………… 15

■ Installation ……………………………………… 16

D Single body mounting………………………… 16

D Stand…………………………………………… 16

D Front panel separation ……………………… 16

D Front panel mounting ………………………… 16

■ Required connections…………………………… 17

■ Advanced connections ………………………… 18

■ Power supply connections……………………… 19

■ Connecting a DC power supply ……………… 19

■ Battery connections …………………………… 19

■ External antenna tuners………………………… 20

■ Linear ampliﬁer connections …………………… 21

■ Connections for CW …………………………… 22

■ Connections for RTTY ………………………… 23

D Connections for RTTY (FSK)………………… 23

D Connections for RTTY (AFSK) ……………… 23

■ Connections for packet, SSTV or PSK31 …… 24

D When connecting to [DATA] socket ………… 24

D When connecting to [ACC] socket ………… 24

D When connecting to [MIC] connector ……… 24

3 BASIC OPERATION ……………………25–38

■ When ﬁrst applying power (CPU resetting)…… 25

D Menu resetting (M-1)………………………… 25

■ Initial settings …………………………………… 25

■ VFO description ………………………………… 26

D Differences between VFO and

memory mode ………………………………… 26

■ VFO operation …………………………………… 27

D Selecting VFO A/VFO B ……………………… 27

D VFO equalization……………………………… 27

■ Selecting VFO/memory mode ………………… 27

■ Selecting an operating band …………………… 28

D Using the band stacking registers…………… 28

■ Frequency setting ……………………………… 29

D Tuning with the main dial …………………… 29

D Direct frequency entry

with the microphone’s keypad ……………… 29

D Programmable tuning step…………………… 30

D Selecting “kHz” step ………………………… 30

D Selecting 1 Hz or 10 Hz step

(SSB/CW/RTTY only) ………………………… 31

D 1 MHz quick tuning step

(FM/WFM/AM only)…………………………… 31

⁄4

tuning function (CW/RTTY only) ………… 32

D Auto tuning step function …………………… 33

D Band edge warning beep …………………… 33

■ Volume setting…………………………………… 33

■ Operating mode selection ……………………… 34

■ Voice synthesizer function……………………… 34

■ Squelch and receive (RF) sensitivity ………… 35

■ Meter function …………………………………… 36

D Multi-function meter…………………………… 36

■ Lock functions …………………………………… 37

D Dial lock function ……………………………… 37

D Microphone lock function …………………… 37

■ Basic transmit operation ……………………… 37

D Transmitting …………………………………… 37

D Setting output power ………………………… 38

D Setting microphone gain……………………… 38

4 RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT ……………39–69

■ Operating SSB…………………………………… 39

D Convenient functions for receive …………… 39

D Convenient functions for transmit…………… 40

D About 5 MHz band operation

(USA version only) …………………………… 40

■ Operating CW …………………………………… 41

D Convenient functions for receive …………… 42

D Convenient functions for transmit…………… 42

D CW reverse mode …………………………… 43

D CW side tone function………………………… 43

D CW pitch control ……………………………… 44

■ Electronic CW keyer …………………………… 45

D Memory keyer send menu …………………… 46

D Editing a keyer memory ……………………… 47

D Contest number set mode …………………… 48

1 Number Style ……………………………… 48

2 Count UP Trigger …………………………… 48

3 Present Number …………………………… 48

D Keyer set mode ……………………………… 49

1 Keyer Repeat Time ………………………… 49

2 Dot/Dash Ratio……………………………… 49

3 Rise Time …………………………………… 50

TABLE OF CONTENTS

4 Paddle Polarity ……………………………… 50

5 Keyer Type ………………………………… 50

6 MIC U/D Keyer (HM-103) ………………… 50

D Paddle operation from [MIC] connector …… 50

■ Operating RTTY (FSK) ………………………… 51

D Convenient functions for receive …………… 52

D RTTY reverse mode ………………………… 53

D Twin peak ﬁlter………………………………… 53

D Functions for the RTTY decoder indication… 54

D Setting the decoder threshold level ………… 54

D RTTY decode set mode ……………………… 55

1 RTTY Decode USOS ……………………… 55

2 RTTY Decode New Line Code …………… 55

Pre-setting for using RTTY terminal or TNC

…56

■ Operating AM …………………………………… 57

D Convenient functions for receive …………… 57

D Convenient functions for transmit…………… 58

■ Operating FM …………………………………… 59

D Convenient functions for receive …………… 59

D Convenient functions for transmit…………… 59

D Tone squelch operation ……………………… 60

D DTCS operation ……………………………… 61

D Tone scan operation ………………………… 62

■ Repeater operation……………………………… 63

D One-touch repeater function ………………… 63

D Repeater tone frequency …………………… 64

D Transmit frequency monitor check ………… 65

D Auto repeater function (USA version only) … 65

D Storing a non standard repeater …………… 66

■ 1750 Hz tone burst ……………………………… 67

■ DTMF memory encoder………………………… 67

D DTMF send menu …………………………… 67

D Programming a DTMF code ………………… 68

D DTMF speed…………………………………… 68

5 FUNCTIONS FOR RECEIVE……………69–82

■ Simple band scope ……………………………… 69

D Fix mode ……………………………………… 70

D Center mode…………………………………… 71

D Scope set mode ……………………………… 71

1 Max Hold …………………………………… 72

2 Scope Size ………………………………… 72

3 FAST Sweep………………………………… 72

4 FAST Sweep Sound ……………………… 72

■ Preamp and attenuator ………………………… 72

■ RIT function ……………………………………… 73

■ AGC function …………………………………… 74

D AGC time constant selection………………… 74

D Setting the AGC time constant ……………… 74

■ IF ﬁlter selection ………………………………… 75

D IF ﬁlter selection ……………………………… 75

D Filter passband width setting

(SSB/CW/RTTY/AM only) …………………… 76

D IF ﬁlter shape (SSB/CW only) ……………… 76

■ Twin PBT operation …………………………… 77

■ Noise blanker …………………………………… 78

D Noise blanker set mode ……………………… 78

1 NB Level …………………………………… 78

2 NB Width …………………………………… 78

■ Noise reduction ………………………………… 79

D Noise reduction set mode …………………… 79

➥ NR Level …………………………………… 79

■ Notch function …………………………………… 80

D Auto notch function …………………………… 80

D Manual notch function………………………… 81

D Manual notch ﬁlter set mode ………………… 81

■ Voice squelch control function ………………… 82

■ Meter peak hold function ……………………… 82

6 FUNCTIONS FOR TRANSMIT …………83–92

■ VOX function …………………………………… 83

D Adjusting the VOX function ………………… 83

D VOX set mode ………………………………… 84

1 VOX Gain …………………………………… 84

2 Anti-VOX …………………………………… 84

3 VOX Delay ………………………………… 84

■ Transmit ﬁlter width setting (SSB only) ……… 84

■ Break-in function ………………………………… 85

D Semi break-in operation……………………… 85

D Full break-in operation ……………………… 85

■ ∂TX function …………………………………… 86

■ Monitor function ………………………………… 87

■ Speech compressor …………………………… 87

D Compression level setting …………………… 88

➥ COMP Level ……………………………… 88

■ Split frequency operation ……………………… 89

■ Quick split function ……………………………… 90

D Split offset frequency setting ………………… 91

D Quick split setting …………………………… 91

■ Measuring SWR ………………………………… 92

D Spot measurement …………………………… 92

D Plot measurement …………………………… 92

7 VOICE RECORDER FUNCTIONS ……93–99

■ Digital voice recorder …………………………… 93

■ Recording a received audio …………………… 93

D Basic recording ……………………………… 93

D One-touch voice recording…………………… 94

■ Playing the recorded contents ………………… 94

■ Erasing the recorded contents ………………… 95

■ Recording a message for transmit …………… 96

D Recording ……………………………………… 96

D Conﬁrming/Erasing the recorded message… 96

■ Programming a memory name for transmit … 97

■ Sending a recorded message ………………… 98

D Transmit level setting ………………………… 98

■ Voice set mode ………………………………… 99

D Voice set mode ……………………………… 99

1 Auto Monitor ………………………………… 99

2 MIC Memo…………………………………… 99

8 MEMORY OPERATION ………………100–110

■ Memory channels ……………………………… 100

■ Memory channel selection …………………… 100

■ Memory programming ………………………… 101

D Programming in VFO mode………………… 101

D Programming in memory mode …………… 102

■ Memory channel list …………………………… 103

TABLE OF CONTENTS

D Selecting a memory channel

using the memory channel list……………… 103

D Setting a memory channel

as a select memory ………………………… 104

D Selecting a memory bank ………………… 104

D Memory names ……………………………… 105

■ Memory clearing ……………………………… 106

D Memory clearing

using the memory channel list……………… 106

■ Frequency transferring………………………… 107

D Transferring in VFO mode ………………… 107

D Transferring in memory mode……………… 108

■ Memo pads …………………………………… 109

D Writing frequencies and operating modes

into memo pads……………………………… 109

D Calling up a frequency from a memo pad … 110

9 SCAN OPERATION …………………111–113

■ Scan types ……………………………………… 111

■ Preparation……………………………………… 111

■ Programmed scan operation ………………… 112

■ Memory scan operation ……………………… 112

■ Select memory scan operation ……………… 113

■ Priority watch …………………………………… 113

10 ANTENNA TUNER OPERATION … 114–115

■ Optional AT-180

AUTOMATIC ANTENNA TUNER

operation………………………………………… 114

D Tuner operation ……………………………… 114

D Manual tuning………………………………… 114

■ Optional AH-4

AUTOMATIC ANTENNA TUNER

operation………………………………………… 115

D AH-4 operation ……………………………… 115

11 PACKET OPERATION …………………… 116

■ Packet operation ……………………………… 116

D Data socket…………………………………… 116

D Adjusting the data speed …………………… 116

D Adjusting the transmit signal output

from the TNC ………………………………… 116

12 CLOCK AND TIMERS ……………… 117–119

■ Time set mode ………………………………… 117

1 Year ………………………………………… 117

2 Date ………………………………………… 117

3 Time (Now) ………………………………… 117

4 CLOCK2 Function ………………………… 117

5 CLOCK2 Offset …………………………… 117

6 Auto Power OFF …………………………… 117

D Setting the current year …………………… 118

D Setting the current date …………………… 118

D Setting the current time …………………… 118

D Clock2 function activity……………………… 119

D Clock2 offset setting ………………………… 119

D Auto power OFF activity …………………… 119

13 SET MODE ………………………… 120–136

■ Set mode description ………………………… 120

■ Quick set mode ………………………………… 121

➥ RF Power (all modes) ……………………… 121

➥ MIC Gain (SSB/AM/FM modes)…………… 121

➥ SSB TBW (WIDE) L (SSB mode) ………… 121

➥ SSB TBW (WIDE) H (SSB mode) ………… 122

➥ SSB TBW (MID) L (SSB mode) …………… 122

➥ SSB TBW (MID) H (SSB mode) ………… 122

➥ SSB TBW (NAR) L (SSB mode) ………… 122

➥ SSB TBW (NAR) H (SSB mode) ………… 122

➥ Key Speed (CW mode) …………………… 122

➥ CW Pitch (CW mode) ……………………… 122

➥ Side Tone Level (CW mode) ……………… 123

➥ Side Tone Level Limit (CW mode)………… 123

➥ Twin Peak Filter (RTTY mode) …………… 123

➥ RTTY Mark Frequency (RTTY mode) …… 123

➥ RTTY Shift Width (RTTY mode) ………… 123

➥ RTTY Keying Polarity (RTTY mode)……… 123

■ Display set mode ……………………………… 124

1 Contrast (LCD)……………………………… 124

2 Bright (LCD) ………………………………… 124

3 LCD Unit Bright …………………………… 124

4 LCD Flicker ………………………………… 124

5 Backlight (Switches) ……………………… 124

6 Display Type………………………………… 124

7 Display Font Type ………………………… 125

8 Display Font Size ………………………… 125

9 Meter Peak Hold …………………………… 125

10 Filter Popup (PBT) ………………………… 125

11 Filter Popup (FIL)…………………………… 125

12 1 Hz Mode Popup ………………………… 125

13 Scope CENTER/FIX Popup ……………… 125

14 TV Popup (CH Up/Down) ………………… 126

15 TV Popup (P.AMP/ATT) …………………… 126

16 Voice TX Name Display …………………… 126

17 Keyer Memory Display …………………… 126

18 DTMF Memory Display …………………… 126

19 External Display …………………………… 126

20 Opening Message ………………………… 126

21 My Call ……………………………………… 127

22 Power ON Check…………………………… 127

■ Miscellaneous (others) set mode …………… 128

1 Monitor ……………………………………… 128

2 Monitor Level ……………………………… 128

3 Beep (Conﬁrmation) ……………………… 128

4 Beep (Band edge) ………………………… 128

5 Beep Level ………………………………… 128

6 Beep Level Limit …………………………… 128

7 RF/SQL Control …………………………… 129

8 Quick SPLIT………………………………… 129

9 SPLIT Offset………………………………… 129

10 SPLIT LOCK………………………………… 129

11 DUP Offset HF ……………………………… 129

12 DUP Offset 50M …………………………… 129

13 DUP Offset 144M ………………………… 130

14 DUP Offset 430M ………………………… 130

15 One Touch Repeater ……………………… 130

16 Auto Repeater ……………………………… 130

TABLE OF CONTENTS

17 Tuner (Auto Start) ………………………… 130

18 Tuner (PTT start) …………………………… 131

19 [TUNER] Switch …………………………… 131

20 VSEND Select ……………………………… 131

21 SPEECH Level …………………………… 131

22 SPEECH Language ……………………… 131

23 SPEECH Speed …………………………… 131

24 SPEECH S-Level ………………………… 132

25 SPEECH [MODE] Switch ………………… 132

26 Memopad Numbers ……………………… 132

27 SCAN Speed ……………………………… 132

28 SCAN Resume …………………………… 132

29 MAIN DIAL Auto TS ……………………… 132

30 HM-151 [F-1] ……………………………… 133

31 HM-151 [F-2] ……………………………… 133

32 MIC Up/Down Speed ……………………… 133

33 Quick RIT/∂TX Clear ……………………… 133

34 SSB/CW Synchronous Tuning …………… 133

35 CW Normal Side …………………………… 134

36 VOICE 1st Menu ………………………… 134

37 KEYER 1st Menu ………………………… 134

38 DTMF 1st Menu …………………………… 134

39 Mode Select (SSB) ………………………… 134

40 Mode Select (CW) ………………………… 134

41 Mode Select (RTTY) ……………………… 134

42 Mode Select (AM) ………………………… 135

43 Mode Select (FM) ………………………… 135

44 Mode Select (WFM) ……………………… 135

45 External Keypad (VOICE) ………………… 135

46 External Keypad (KEYER)………………… 135

47 Front Keypad Type ………………………… 136

48 CI-V Baud Rate …………………………… 136

49 CI-V Address ……………………………… 136

50 CI-V Transceive …………………………… 136

51 REF Adjust ………………………………… 136

14 MAINTENANCE ………………………… 137

■ Fuse replacement……………………………… 137

■ Memory backup………………………………… 137

■ Cleaning ………………………………………… 137

15 TROUBLESHOOTING …………… 138–139

16 OPTIONAL UNITS SETTING ………140–141

■ MB-106

CARRYING HANDLE

…………………… 140

■ Band voltage modiﬁcation …………………… 140

■ AT-180 internal switch description …………… 141

17 CONTROL COMMAND …………… 142–147

■ Remote jack (CI-V) information ……………… 142

D CI-V connection example…………………… 142

D Data format…………………………………… 142

D Command table……………………………… 142

D To send/read memory contents …………… 146

D Band stacking register ……………………… 146

D Codes for memory keyer contents ………… 146

D Character codes for My Call ……………… 147

D Codes for memory name contents………… 147

D Split/Duplex frequency setting……………… 147

D Repeater tone/tone squelch frequency

setting ………………………………………… 147

D DTCS code and polarity setting …………… 147

18 SPECIFICATIONS…………………………148

■ General ………………………………………… 148

■ Transmitter……………………………………… 148

■ Receiver ………………………………………… 148

19 OPTIONS ……………………………149–150

20 MENU GUIDE ………………………151–152

21 ABOUT CE ………………………… 153–154

TABLE OF CONTENTS

q AF GAIN CONTROL [AF(

SET

)] (inner control; p. 33)

➥ Rotate to vary the audio output level from the

speaker or headphones.

Push momentarily to enter the set mode menu.

•Push again to exit the set mode menu.

w RF GAIN CONTROL/SQUELCH CONTROL

[RF/SQL] (outer control; p. 35)

Adjusts the RF gain and squelch threshold level.

The squelch, when closed, mutes the speaker or

headphones when no signal is received, reducing

noise.

•The squelch is particularly effective for FM mode. It is

also available in other modes.

•12 to 1 o’clock position is recommended for any setting

of the [RF/SQL] control.

•The control can be set to ‘Auto’ (RF gain control in SSB,

CW and RTTY; squelch control in AM, FM and WFM) or

squelch control (RF gain is ﬁxed at maximum) in the mis-

cellaneous (others) set mode as follows. (p. 129)

•When functioning as RF gain/squelch control

•When functioning as RF gain control

(Squelch is ﬁxed open; SSB, CW, RTTY only)

•When functioning as squelch control

(RF gain is ﬁxed at maximum.)

e POWER KEY [PWR] (p. 25)

➥ While transceiver’s power is OFF, push to turn the

power ON.

•Turn the DC power supply ON in advance.

➥ While transceiver’s power is ON, push and hold

for 1 sec. to turn the power OFF.

r FRONT PANEL LATCH (p. 16)

Pull away from the transceiver (towards yourself

when looking at the front of the transceiver) to de-

tach the front panel from the main body of the trans-

ceiver.

t PASSBAND TUNING/M-ch/RIT CONTROLS

[PBT/M-ch/RIT]

➥ Push inner control to toggle the twin Passband

Tuning (PBT) or memory channel/RIT function

ON and OFF.

➥ While Twin PBT is selected (p. 77):

●

Adjusts the receiver’s DSP filter passband

width.

•Passband width and shift frequency are displayed

on the LCD.

•The default variable range is half of the IF filter

passband width. 25 Hz step is available.

●

Push and hold inner control for 1 sec. to return

the PBT to default settings.

Low cutHigh cut Center

+–

PBT1

PBT2

Squelch is

open.

S-meter

squelch

S-meter squelch

threshold

Noise squelch

threshold

(FM mode)

Lowest threshold Highest threshold

Noise squelch (FM mode)

Minimum RF gain

Adjustable

range

Maximum RF gain

Recommended level

RF gain

adjustable

range

Maximum

RF gain

S-meter shows

squelch level

Noise squelch (FM mode)

Squelch is

open.

MODE

SSB, CW

RTTY

AM, FM

WFM

Auto

RF GAIN

SQL

SET MODE SELECTION

SQL

RF + SQL

Audio outut

decreases

Audio output

increases

PANEL DESCRIPTION

■ Front panel

See the illustration of the Front panel on page i-2.

✔

What is the PBT control?

PBT electronically narrows the IF passband width to reject

interference. This transceiver uses DSP to implement PBT.

➥ While M-ch/RIT is selected:

●

Rotate the inner control to select a memory

channel number (p. 100).

●

Push and hold inner control for 1 sec. to turn

the RIT/∂TX mode ON (pgs. 73, 86).

•Push [

(

GRP

)] to exit the RIT/∂TX mode.

●

While the RIT/∂TX mode is OFF:

Rotate outer control to select a memory bank

(p. 104).

●

While the RIT/∂TX is ON:

Rotate outer control to shift the receive or

transmit frequency (pgs. 73, 86).

•“ ” or “ ” indicators appear when the RIT or

∂TX function is activate, respectively.

•The shift frequency range is ± 9.999 kHz in 1 Hz

steps (or ±9.99 kHz in 10 Hz steps).

•When the RIT or ∂TX function is ON, push and

hold [F-1

RRIITT

] or [F-2

∂∂TTXX

] for 1 sec. to add or

subtract the frequency shift to the display fre-

quency.

✔

What is the RIT function?

RIT (Receiver Incremental Tuning) shifts the receive fre-

quency without shifting the transmit frequency.

This is useful for ﬁne tuning for stations calling you off fre-

quency or when you prefer to listen to slightly different-

sounding voice characteristics, etc.

✔

What is the

∂∂

TX function?

The ∂TX shifts the transmit frequency without shifting the re-

ceive frequency. This is useful for simple split frequency op-

eration in CW, etc.

y TWIN PBT (M-ch/RIT) INDICATOR

(pgs. 73, 77, 86, 100)

➥ Indicates the status of [PBT/M-ch/RIT] (t) as the

Twin PBT function or memory channel/RIT con-

trol.

•Indicator is green when the Twin PBT is selected.

•Indicator is off when the M-ch/RIT is selected.

u MENU/GROUP KEYS [MENU/GRP] (p. 151)

➥ Push either key one or more times to select

menus within a menu group (

(Graphic)).

➥ Push and hold for 1 sec. to select one of the three

menu groups:

and

(Scope) to

(SWR meter).

i TUNER/CALL KEY [TUNER/CALL]

➥ During HF/50 MHz operation (p. 114):

●

Push momentarily to toggle the automatic an-

tenna tuner function ON and OFF.

•An optional antenna tuner must be connected.

•“ ”indicator appears when the tuner is ON.

●

Push and hold for 2 sec. to manually tune the

antenna.

•An optional antenna tuner must be connected.

•“ ”indicator appears when the tuner is ON.

➥ During 144/430 MHz operation (p. 100):

Push momentarily to select the call channel (or

return to the previous channel/frequency when

the call channel is already selected).

•“C1” is the 144 MHz call channel and “C2” is the 430

MHz call channel.

o MULTI-FUNCTION KEYS [F-1]/[F-2]/[F-3]/[F-4]

➥ Push to select the function indicated in the LCD

display above these keys. (pgs. 5–8, 151)

•Functions vary depending on the active menu.

Functions appear

M-ch

RIT

M-ch

RIT

Frequency

decreases

Frequency

increases

Channel

decreases

Channel

increases

∂TX

RIT

PANEL DESCRIPTION

See the illustration of the Front panel on page i-2.

PANEL DESCRIPTION

!0 MANUAL NOTCH KEY [MNF/ADJ] (p. 81)

➥ Push momentarily to turn the manual notch func-

tion ON and OFF in SSB, CW and AM modes.

•“ ” appears on the display when the function is ac-

tivated.

➥ Push and hold for 1 sec. to enter the manual

notch ﬁlter set mode.

✔

What is the notch function?

The notch function is a narrow DSP ﬁlter that removes inter-

fering tones from CW or AM signals while preserving the de-

sired signal's frequency response.

!1 AUTO NOTCH/VOICE RECORDER KEY

[ANF/

•

REC]

➥ Push momentarily to turn the auto notch function

(ANF) ON and OFF in SSB, AM, FM modes.

(p. 80)

•“ ” appears on the display when the function is ac-

tivated.

➥ Push and hold for 1 sec. to record the received

signal’s audio. (p. 93)

!2 SPCH/LOCK KEY [SPCH/LOCK]

➥ Push momentarily to have the frequency, etc. an-

nounced by the speech synthesizer. (p. 34)

•The parameters to be announced can be selected in

the miscellaneous (others) set mode. (pgs. 131, 132)

➥ Push and hold for 1 sec. to toggle the dial lock

function ON and OFF. (p. 37)

•The dial lock function electronically locks the main

dial.

•“ ” appears while the dial lock function is active.

!3 MICROPHONE CONNECTOR (p. 10)

Modular-type microphone connector—accepts the

supplied microphone (HM-151).

•The optional OPC-589 can be used to connect an 8-pin

microphone such as the SM-20, if desired.

•A microphone connector is also available on the rear

panel. DO NOT connect 2 microphones simultaneously.

UP/DOWN (BAND) KEYS

[Y(

BAND

)]/[

(

BAND

)]

➥ Push momentarily to select a frequency band.

➥ Push and hold

[Y(

BAND

)]

for 1 sec. to toggle the

simple band scope display ON and OFF.

➥ Push and hold

[Z(

BAND

)]

for 1 sec. to toggle the

multi-function meter display ON and OFF.

!5 MAIN DIAL TENSION LATCH

Selects the main dial drag.

•Three positions are available. The upper setting turns on

clicks as the dial is turned.

!6 HEADPHONE JACK [PHONES] (p. 18)

Accepts headphones with 8–16 Ω impedance.

•When headphones are connected, no receive audio

comes from the speaker.

•When the PHONES/SPEAKER switch on the back of the

front panel is set to the [SPEAKER] position, an external

speaker can be used instead of headphones. This is

convenient for mobile or outdoor operation.

!7 MAIN DIAL [DIAL]

Changes the displayed frequency and selects val-

ues for selected set mode items, etc.

!8 RECEIVE/TRANSMIT INDICATORS [RX]/[TX]

➥[RX]: Lights green in receive mode and when

squelch is open.

➥[TX]: Lights red while transmitting.

Back of the front panel

See the illustration of the Front panel on page i-2.

PANEL DESCRIPTION

!9 TUNING STEP KEY [TS] (pgs. 30–32)

➥ While in SSB/CW/RTTY modes, push momentar-

ily to turn the programmable tuning step ON and

OFF. While in AM/FM/WFM modes, push mo-

mentarily to toggle the programmable tuning step

and 1 MHz quick tuning step.

•While the programmable tuning step indicator is dis-

played, the frequency can be changed in the pro-

grammed kHz step size.

•0.01 (AM/FM/WFM mode only), 0.1, 1, 5, 9, 10, 12.5,

20, 25 and 100 kHz tuning steps are available.

•1 MHz quick tuning step is only available in AM, FM

and WFM modes.

➥ While programmable tuning steps are OFF, turns

the 1 Hz step ON and OFF when pushed and

held for 1 sec.

•1 and 10 Hz steps are only available in SSB, CW and

RTTY modes.

•1 Hz indication appears, and the frequency can be

changed in 1 Hz steps.

➥ While the programmable tuning step is ON, en-

ters the tuning step selection mode when pushed

and held for 1 sec.

@0 NOISE BLANKER KEY [NB/ADJ] (p. 78)

➥ Push momentarily to turn the noise blanker ON

and OFF. The noise blanker reduces pulse-type

noise such as that generated by automobile igni-

tion systems. This function does not work on non-

pulse noise or in WFM mode.

•“ ” appears when the noise blanker is ON.

➥ Push and hold for 1 sec. to enter the noise

blanker set mode.

@1 NOISE REDUCTION KEY [NR/LEV] (p. 79)

➥ Push momentarily to turn DSP noise reduction

ON and OFF.

•“ ” appears on the display when the function is ac-

tivated.

➥ Push and hold for 1 sec. to enter the DSP noise

reduction level.

@2 FUNCTION DISPLAY

Shows the operating frequency, function key menus,

simple band scope display, selected memory chan-

nel, etc. See p. 13 for details.

@3 PRE AMP/ATTENUATOR KEY [P.AMP/ATT]

(p. 72)

➥ Push momentarily to turn the preamp ON or OFF.

•“ ” indicator appears when the preamp is acti-

vated.

➥ Push and hold for 1 sec. to turn the 12 dB attenu-

ator ON; push momentarily to turn the attenuator

OFF.

•“ ”indicator appears when the attenuator is ac-

tivated.

✔

What is the preamp?

The preamp ampliﬁes signals in the receiver front end (input)

circuit to improve the sensitivity. Turn ON ‘P.AMP’ when re-

ceiving weak signals.

✔

What is the attenuator?

The attenuator prevents a strong undesired signal near the

desired frequency or near your location, such as from a

broadcast station, from causing distortion or spurious sig-

nals.

@4 MODE KEY [MODE] (p. 34)

➥ Push momentarily to cycle through the operating

modes:

USB/LSB ➧ CW/CW-R ➧

RTTY/RTTY-R ➧ AM/FM/WFM

➥ Push and hold for 1 sec. to toggle the following

operating modes:

USB ↔ LSB

CW ↔ CW-R

RTTY ↔ RTTY-R

AM → FM → WFM → AM, etc

OPERATING MODE SELECTION

Push

momentarily

Push and hold

for 1 sec.

USB LSB

AM FM WFM

CW CW-R

RTTY-R

RTTY

Programmable tuning step indicator

See the illustration of the Front panel on page i-2.

PANEL DESCRIPTION

■ Multi-function keys

D Menu M-1 functions

SPLIT OPERATION

➥ Push momentarily to toggle the split func-

tion ON and OFF. (p. 89)

•“”and transmit frequency appear when

the split function is ON.

➥ Push and hold for 1 sec. to turn the quick

split function ON. (p. 90)

•The offset frequency must be programmed in

advance using the miscellaneous (others) set

mode. (pgs. 129, 130)

•The offset frequency is the shift from the dis-

played frequency.

•The quick split function can be turned OFF in

the miscellaneous (others) set mode. (p. 129)

VFO A/B SELECTION

➥ Push momentarily to exchange the trans-

mit VFO and receive VFO contents. (p.

27)

➥ Push momentarily to toggle the transmis-

sion VFO and reception VFO during split

operation. (p. 89)

➥ Push momentarily to toggle the transmit

and receive frequencies (and modes) of

memory channels when the split function

is turned ON.

➥ Push and hold for 1 sec. to equalize the

frequency and operating mode of the two

VFO’s.

•The lower indicated frequency and operating

mode are equalized to the upper (indicated)

VFO frequency and operating mode.

FILTER SELECTION (p. 75)

➥ Push momentarily to select one of three

IF ﬁlter settings.

➥ Push and hold for 1 sec. to enter the ﬁlter

set mode.

TRANSMIT FREQUENCY CHECK (pgs. 65, 89)

Monitors the transmit frequency when

pushed and held.

•While pushing and holding this key, the trans-

mit frequency can be changed with [DIAL].

D Menu M-2 functions

MEMORY MENU (p. 103)

Push momentarily to indicate the memory

frequency and modes.

•Memory list indication is available.

MEMORY WRITE (pgs. 101, 102)

Push and hold for 1 sec. to store the se-

lected frequency and operating mode into

the displayed memory channel.

MEMORY CLEAR (p. 106)

Push and hold for 1 sec. to clear the se-

lected memory channel contents.

•“ ”appears.

VFO/MEMORY SELECTION

➥ Push momentarily to toggle VFO and

memory modes. (pgs. 27, 100)

➥ Push and hold for 1 sec. to transfer the

selected memory channel to the currently

displayed VFO. (p. 107)

D Menu M-3 functions

DURING SSB OPERATION:

DURING CW OPERATION:

DURING RTTY OPERATION:

DURING AM OPERATION:

F-1 F-2 F-3 F-4

VOX AGC

F-1 F-2 F-3 F-4

1/4 AGC

F-1 F-2 F-3 F-4

1/4BRK AGC

F-1 F-2 F-3 F-4

TBWVOX COM AGC

F-4

V/M

F-3

MCL

F-2

F-1

MEM

F-1 F-2 F-3 F-4

MWMEM V/M

MCL

F-4

XFC

F-3

FIL

F-2

A/B

F-1

SPL

SPL A/B FIL XFC

F-1 F-2 F-3 F-4

PANEL DESCRIPTION

DURING FM/WFM OPERATIONS:

VOX FUNCTION (p. 83)

➥ Push momentarily to toggle the VOX func-

tion ON and OFF.

•“ ” appears when the VOX function is

ON.

➥ Push and hold for 1 sec. to enter the VOX

set mode.

•The VOX gain, ANTI-VOX and VOX delay

can be set in VOX set mode.

✔

What is the VOX function?

The VOX function (voice operated transmission) activates

the transmitter when you speak into the microphone and au-

tomatically returns to receive when you stop speaking.

SPEECH COMPRESSOR (p. 87)

➥ Push momentarily to toggle the speech

compressor ON and OFF.

•“ ” appears when the speech compres-

sor is ON.

➥ Push and hold for 1 sec. to enter the com-

pression level set mode.

•Speech compression can be adjusted in

compression level set mode.

AGC (p. 74)

➥ Push to change the time constant of the

AGC circuit.

•“ ,” “ ” or “ ” appears when

the fast time constant, middle time constant

or slow time constant is selected, respec-

tively.

➥ Push and hold for 1 sec. to enter the AGC

set mode.

•“ ” (OFF) can be selected.

TBW (p. 84)

➥ Push momentarily to indicate the selected

TX ﬁlter width.

•The popup indicator appears.

➥ Push and hold for 1 sec. to toggle the TX

filter width between narrow, middle or

wide.

•The following ﬁlters are speciﬁed as the de-

fault. Each ﬁlter width can be set in the quick

set mode. (pgs. 121, 122)

WIDE : 100 Hz to 2900 Hz

MID : 300 Hz to 2700 Hz

NAR : 500 Hz to 2500 Hz

BREAK-IN FUNCTION (p. 85)

➥ Push momentarily to select semi break-in,

full break-in (QSK) and break-in OFF.

•“ ” or “ ” appears when selecting

semi break-in or full break-in, respectively.

•An external switch, such as a foot switch,

must be connected to the ACC socket (pin 3,

pin 7 or RTTY SEND—see p. 23) if break-in

is turned OFF.

➥ Push and hold for 1 sec. to enter the

break-in delay time set mode.

✔

What is the break-in function?

Full break-in (QSK) activates the receiver between transmit-

ted dots and dashes. This is useful when operating in nets,

or during DX pile-ups and during contests, when “fast re-

sponses” are common.

1/4 FUNCTION

Push to toggle the 1/4-speed tuning func-

tion ON and OFF in CW and RTTY

modes.

•When the

⁄

4 function is ON, “ ” appears

and ﬁne tuning can be used.

DUPLEX FUNCTION (p. 63)

➥ Push to select the duplex transmit offset

direction or turn the function OFF.

➥ Push and hold for 1 sec. to turn the one-

touch repeater function ON/OFF.

FM TONE OPERATION

➥ Push momentarily to set the subaudible

tone encoder for repeater use, tone

squelch function, DTCS and OFF.

•“ ” appears when the repeater tone

function is ON. (p. 63)

•“ ” appears when the tone squelch func-

tion is ON. (p. 60)

•“ ” appears when the DTCS squelch

function is ON. (p. 61)

➥ Push and hold for 1 sec. to enter the tone

frequency or DTCS code set mode. (pgs.

60, 61)

•Tone scan function is also available. (p. 62)

➥ Push and hold to transmit a 1750 Hz tone

when pushing and holding [PTT]. (p. 67)

9600 MODE

Push to turn the 9600 bps data transmis-

sion mode ON and OFF. (p. 116)

F-4

9600

F-3

TON

F-2

DUP

F-2

1/4

F-1

BRK

F-4

TBW

F-3

AGC

F-2

COM

F-1

VOX

F-1 F-2 F-3 F-4

VOX DUP TON

9600

PANEL DESCRIPTION

D Menu S-1 functions

DURING SSB/AM OPERATION:

DURING CW OPERATION:

DURING RTTY OPERATION:

DURING FM/WFM OPERATIONS:

VO (p. 93)

Push to enter the voice recorder mode.

•The voice TX/RX menu or voice root menu

appears depending on the “

VVOOIICCEE 11sstt

MMeennuu

” setting in the miscellaneous (others)

set mode. (p. 134)

METER SELECTION (p. 36)

Push to select the type of metering dis-

played (during transmit) on the display.

•Power, SWR, ALC or COMP metering can be

selected.

•Only the S-meter is available during receive.

VOICE SQUELCH CONTROL (p. 82)

Push to toggle the voice squelch control

function ON and OFF.

KEYER OPERATION (p. 45)

Push to enter the memory keyer mode.

•The keyer send menu or keyer root menu ap-

pears depending on the “

KKEEYYEERR 11sstt

MMeennuu

” setting in the miscellaneous (others)

set mode.(p. 134)

RTTY DECODER FUNCTION (p. 54)

Push to toggle the RTTY decoder display

ON and OFF.

•RTTY decoder screen appears.

DTMF OPERATION

Push to enter DTMF memory mode.

(p. 67)

•The DTMF send menu or DTMF root menu

appears depending on the “

DDTTMMFF 11sstt

MMeennuu

” setting in the miscellaneous (others)

set mode. (p. 134)

D Menu S-2 functions

DURING VFO MODE:

DURING MEMORY MODE:

SCAN (pgs. 111–113)

➥ Push momentarily to start or stop the

scan function.

PRIORITY WATCH (p. 113)

Push to start or stop priority watch.

VFO/MEMORY SELECTION

➥ Push momentarily to toggle VFO and

memory modes. (pgs. 27, 100)

➥ Push and hold for 1 sec. to transfer the

frequency and operating mode in the se-

lected memory channel to the currently

displayed VFO. (p. 107)

VOICE SQUELCH CONTROL (p. 82)

Push to toggle the voice squelch control

function ON and OFF.

SELECT SCAN

➥ Push momentarily to toggle the select

scan settings ON and OFF for the se-

lected memory channel. (pgs. 104, 113)

➥ Push and hold for 2 sec. to clear all select

scan setting. (p. 113)

➥ While scanning, push to toggle the se-

lected memory scan ON and OFF.

(p. 113)

F-2

SEL

F-4

VSC

F-3

V/M

F-2

PRI

F-1

SCN

F-1 F-2 F-3 F-4

VSCSCN SEL V/M

F-1 F-2 F-3 F-4

VSCSCN PRI V/M

F-4

DTM

F-2

DEC

F-2

KEY

F-4

VSC

F-3

MET

F-1

F-1 F-2 F-3 F-4

VSCVO DTM MET

F-1 F-2 F-3 F-4

VSCVO DEC MET

F-1 F-2 F-3 F-4

VSCVO KEY MET

F-1 F-2 F-3 F-4

VSCVO MET

PANEL DESCRIPTION

D Menu S-3 functions

MEMORY WRITE (pgs. 101, 102)

Push and hold for 1 sec. to store the dis-

played VFO frequency and operating

mode into the selected memory channel.

MEMO PAD WRITE (p. 109)

Push to store the displayed VFO fre-

quency and operating mode into a memo

pad.

MEMO PAD READ (p. 110)

Push to call up a memo pad.

✔

What is the memo pad function?

The memo pad function stores the frequency and operating

mode for easy recall. The memo pads are separate from the

usual memory channels. The default number of memo pads

is 5, however, this can be increased to 10 in the miscella-

neous (others) set mode, if desired. (p. 132)

D Menu G-1 (Scope) functions

SWEEP STEPS (pgs. 70, 71)

➥ Push momentarily to change the sweep

step size.

•Available steps are ±10, 25, 50, 100 and 250

kHz.

➥ Push and hold for 1 sec. to change the

sweep steps to ±10 kHz.

PEAK HOLD (pgs. 70, 71)

➥ Push to freeze the current simple band

scope display.

•“H” indicator appears while the function is in

use.

➥ Push and hold for 1 sec. to clear the peak

levels.

•Peak levels are displayed in the background

on the simple band scope display. The peak

hold function can be disabled in the scope

set mode. (p. 71)

FIX/CENTER SELECTION (pgs. 70, 71)

➥ Push to toggle the simple band scope ﬁx

mode and center mode.

•Fix mode:

Rotating [DIAL] leaves the marker centered.

•Center mode:

Rotating [DIAL] moves the edge frequencies.

➥ During ﬁx mode operation, push and hold

for 1 sec. to set the displayed frequency

to that of the marker.

SWEEP SPEED

➥ Push momentarily to change the sweep

speed between Fast and Slow. (pgs. 70,

71)

➥ Push and hold for 1 sec. to enter the

scope set mode. (p. 71)

F-4

SPD

F-3

FIX

F-2

HLD

F-1

SPN

F-1 F-2 F-3 F-4

SPN HLD FIX SPD

F-3

MPR

F-2

MPW

F-1

F-1 F-2 F-3 F-4

MW MPW MPR

PANEL DESCRIPTION

z SPCH/LOCK KEY [SPCH/LOCK]

➥ Push momentarily to have the frequency, etc. an-

nounced by the speech synthesizer. (p. 34)

•The parameters to be announced can be selected in

the miscellaneous (others) set mode. (p. 132)

➥ Push and hold for 1 sec. to toggle the microphone

lock function ON and OFF. (p. 37)

x PTT SWITCH [PTT] (p. 37)

Push and hold to transmit; release to receive.

c UP/DOWN SWITCHES [

]/[

]

Change the operating frequency.

•Push and hold to change the frequency repeatedly.

•Tuning step size is 50 Hz if no TS indicator is displayed.

v TRANSMIT INDICATOR (p. 37)

Lights red while transmitting.

b KEYPAD

➥ Pushing a key selects the operating band.

•[(GENE)•] selects the general coverage band.

➥ Pushing the same key 2 or 3 times calls up other

stacked frequencies in the band. (p. 28)

•Icom’s triple band stacking register memorizes 3 fre-

quencies in each band.

➥ After pushing [(F-INP)ENT], enter a numeric fre-

quency, followed by pressing [(F-INP)ENT]

again. (p. 29)

•e.g. to enter 14.195 MHz, push [(F-INP)ENT] [1] [4]

[•] [1] [9] [5] [(F-INP)ENT].

n FILTER SELECTION [FIL]

➥ Push momentarily to select one of three IF ﬁlter

settings. (p. 75)

➥ Push and hold for 1 sec. to enter the filter set

mode. (p. 76)

m MODE KEY [MODE] (p. 34)

➥ Push momentarily to cycle through the operating

modes:

USB/LSB ➧ CW/CW-R ➧

RTTY/RTTY-R ➧ AM/FM/WFM

➥ Push and hold for 1 sec. to toggle the following

operating modes:

USB ↔ LSB

CW ↔ CW-R

RTTY ↔ RTTY-R

AM → FM → WFM → AM, etc

, POWER INDICATOR

Lights green while transceiver power is ON.

. PROGRAMMABLE FUNCTION KEYS [F-1]/[F-2]

Program and perform a selected function.

•The functions can be assigned in the miscellaneous (oth-

ers) set mode (p. 133). The default settings for [F-1] and

[F-2] are “MPW” and “MPR,” respectively.

⁄0 MEMORY WRITE [MW] (pgs. 101, 102)

Push and hold for 1 sec. to store the displayed VFO

frequency and operating mode into the displayed

memory channel.

⁄1 VFO/MEMORY SELECTION [V/M]

➥ Push momentarily to toggle VFO and memory

modes. (pgs. 27, 100)

➥ Push and hold for 1 sec. to transfer the selected

memory channel to the currently displayed VFO.

(p. 107)

⁄2 TRANSMIT FREQUENCY CHECK [XFC]

(pgs. 65, 89)

Monitors the transmit frequency when pushed and

held.

•While pushing and holding this key, the transmit fre-

quency can be changed with [DIAL].

⁄3 TUNER/CALL KEY [TUNER/CALL]

➥ During HF/50 MHz operation (p. 114):

●

Push momentarily to toggle the automatic an-

tenna tuner function ON and OFF.

•An optional antenna tuner must be connected.

•“ ”indicator appears when the tuner is ON.

●

Push and hold for 2 sec. to manually tune the

antenna.

•An optional antenna tuner must be connected.

•“ ”indicator appears when the tuner is ON.

➥ During 144/430 MHz operation (p. 100):

Push momentarily to select the call channel (or

return to the previous channel/frequency when

the call channel is already selected).

•“C1” is the 144 MHz call channel and “C2” is the 430

MHz call channel.

■ Microphone (HM-151)

Default settings

[F-1] (MPW): Push to store the selected readout

frequency and operating mode into

a memo pad.

[F-2] (MPR): Push to call up a memo pad.

See the illustration of the HM-151 on page i-2.

PANEL DESCRIPTION

MICROPHONE CONNECTOR INFORMATION

r PTT

y Microphone input

w Frequency up/down

u GND

q +8 V DC output

i DATA IN

t GND (Microphone ground)

e M8V SW

r PTT

y Microphone input

w Frequency up/down

u GND

q +8 V DC output

i Squelch switch

t GND (Microphone ground)

e M8V SW

Rear panel view

12345678

HM-151

HM-103

CAUTION:DO NOT short pin 1 to ground as

this can damage the internal 8 V regulator.

PIN NO. FUNCTION

DESCRIPTION

• When HM-151 is connected

• When HM-103 is connected

+8 V DC output

Max. 10 mA

Frequency up

Ground

Frequency down

Ground through 470 Ω

HM-151 connection

Grounded to indicate HM-

151 is connected.

HM-151 connection

Open

HM-151 data Control signal input

PIN NO. FUNCTION

DESCRIPTION

1 +8 V DC output

Max. 10 mA

Frequency up

Ground

Frequency down

Ground through 470 Ω

Squelch open

“LOW” level

Squelch closed “HIGH” level

D Microphone connector

R NEVER connect or use the supplied HM-151 (micro-

phone) with other transceiver. This could cause damage to

the transceiver. The HM-151 is designed for use with the IC-

7000 ONLY.

PANEL DESCRIPTION

q ELECTRONIC KEYER JACK [KEY] (p. 22)

Accepts a paddle to activate the internal electronic

keyer.

•Selection between the internal electronic keyer and

straight key operation can be made in the keyer set

mode. (p. 50)

If you use an external electronic keyer, make sure

the output voltage of the keyer is less than 0.4 V

when keying the transmitter.

w ACCESSORY SOCKET [ACC] (p. 12)

Enables connection to external equipment such as a

TNC for data communications, a linear ampliﬁer or

an automatic antenna selector/tuner, etc.

•See page at right for socket wiring information.

e DATA SOCKET [DATA] (p. 12)

6-pin mini-DIN socket to connect a TNC (Terminal

Node Controller), etc. for packet operation.

•See page at right for socket wiring information.

r VIDEO OUT JACK [VOUT] (p. 18)

Outputs a video signal.

t CI-V REMOTE CONTROL JACK [REMOTE]

(p. 142)

➥ Designed for use with a personal computer for re-

mote control of the transceiver functions.

➥ Used for transceiver operation with another Icom

CI-V transceiver or receiver.

y TUNER CONTROL SOCKET [TUNER] (p. 20)

Accepts the control cable from an optional AH-4

/50

AUTOMATIC ANTENNA TUNER

RRTTTTYY JJAACCKK [[RRTTTTYY]]

(p. 23)

Connects an external terminal unit for RTTY (FSK)

operation.

•The keying polarity, mark/shift frequencies and etc. can

be selected in quick set mode (p. 123).

i EXTERNAL SPEAKER JACK [EXT SP] (p. 18)

Accepts a 4–8 Ω speaker.

o MICROPHONE CONNECTOR [MIC] (p. 17)

Accepts the supplied microphone (connected in par-

allel with the front panel’s [MIC] connector).

•See p. 3 for microphone notes.

•See p. 10 for microphone connector information.

!0 GROUND TERMINAL [GND] (p. 15)

Connect this terminal to a station or vehicle ground

to prevent electrical shocks, TVI, BCI and other

problems.

!1 ANTENNA CONNECTOR [ANT1], [ANT2] (p. 17)

Accepts a 50 Ω antenna with a PL-259 connector.

•[ANT1] is for connection to an HF/50 MHz antenna.

•[ANT2] is for connection to an 144/430 MHz antenna.

•ANT1 is used below and ANT2 above 60 MHz.

!2 DC POWER SOCKET [DC13.8V] (p. 19)

Accepts 13.8 V DC through the supplied DC power

cable.

NOTE: DO NOT use a cigarette lighter socket as a

power source when operating in a vehicle. The plug

may cause voltage drops and ignition noise may be

superimposed onto transmit or receive audio.

Rear panel view

When connecting

a straight key

When connecting

a paddle

(dot)

(com)

(dash)

(⊕)

KEY ACC DATA

MIC

ANT2 ANT1

DC 13.8V

GND

qw e yuirto

■ Rear panel

PANEL DESCRIPTION

ACC

PIN No.

NAME DESCRIPTION SPECIFICATIONS

1234

8765

10 11 12

Rear panel view

q brown i gray

w red o white

e orange !0 black

r yellow !1 pink

t green !2 light

blue

y blue

u purple !3 light

green

18VRegulated 8 V output.

Output voltage : 8 V ±0.3 V

Output current : Less than 10 mA

2 GND Connects to ground. ———

Input/output pin. Ground level : –0.5 V to 0.8 V

†

HSEND

(HF/50 MHz only) Output current : Less than 20 mA

Grounded when transmits. Input current (Tx) : Less than 200 mA

4 BDT Data line for the optional AT-180. ———

NC (*If the modiﬁcation (p. 140) is ———

(BAND*)

performed, band voltage output.

)

Output voltage : 0 to 8.0 V

6 ALC ALC voltage input.

Control voltage : –4 V to 0 V

Input impedance : More than 10 kΩ

Input/output pin. Ground level : –0.5 V to 0.8 V

†

VSEND

(144/430 MHz only) Output current : Less than 20 mA

Grounded when transmits. Input current (Tx) : Less than 200 mA

8 13.8 V 13.8 V output when power is ON. Output current : Max. 1 A

9 TKEY Key line for the optional AT-180. ———

“High” level : More than 2.4 V

10 FSKK Controls RTTY keying “Low” level : Less than 0.6 V

Output current : Less than 2 mA

11 MOD

Modulator input.

Input impedance : 10 kΩ

Input level : Approx. 100 mV rms

AF detector output.

Output impedance : 4.7 kΩ

12 AF Fixed level, regardless of [AF]

Output level : 100–300 mV rms

position in

default settings.

13 SQLS

Squelch output. SQL open : Less than 0.3 V/5 mA

Grounded when squelch opens. SQL closed : More than 6.0 V/100 µA

DATA

PIN No.

NAME DESCRIPTION

Rear panel view

1DATAIN Input terminal for data transmit. (1200 bps: AFSK/9600 bps: G3RUH, GMSK)

2 GND Common ground for DATA IN, DATA OUT and AF OUT.

3 PTT P

PTT terminal for packet operation. Connect to ground to activate the transmitter.

When grounded, microphone input (pin 6) of [MIC] connector will be disconnected.

4DATA OUT Data out terminal for 9600 bps operation only.

5 AF OUT Data out terminal for 1200 bps operation only.

Squelch out terminal. This pin is grounded when the transceiver receives a signal

which opens the squelch.

6 SQL •To avoid interfering transmissions, connect squelch to the TNC to inhibit transmission

when squelch is open.

•Keep RF gain at a normal level, otherwise a “SQL

”

signal will not be output.

Color refers to

the cable strands

of the supplied

cable.

D DATA socket

D ACC socket

†

: Activating band can be changed in the miscellaneolus (other) set mode (p. 131).

PANEL DESCRIPTION

q FREQUENCY READOUT

Shows the operating frequency.

w METER READOUTS

➥ Shows received signal strength while receiving.

➥ Shows either transmit power meter (Po), SWR,

ALC or compression level meter (COM) while

transmitting.

e MULTI-FUNCTION KEY GUIDE (p. 151)

Indicates the function of the multi-function keys.

These alphanumeric readouts show a variety of in-

formation such as current functions of the “F” keys

[F-1] to [F-4].

r SPLIT FREQUENCY READOUT (pgs. 89, 90)

Shows the transmit frequency during split operation.

t BLANK MEMORY INDICATOR (p. 101)

Appears when the displayed memory channel is not

programmed (blank channel).

•This indicator appears both in VFO and memory modes.

y MEMORY CHANNEL READOUT (p. 100)

Shows the selected memory channel or scan edge

channel.

•Memory bank indicator (A to E) appears to the left of

memory channel.

•This indicator appears both in VFO and memory modes.

u VFO/MEMORY INDICATORS (pgs. 27, 100)

➥VFO A or B appears when VFO mode is selected;

MEMO appears when memory mode is selected.

i VOICE RECODER INDICATORS (p. 94)

REC appears when the digital voice recoder func-

tion is activated.

o LOCK INDICATOR (p. 37)

Appears when the dial lock function is activated.

!0 DIRECT FREQUENCY ENTRY INDICATOR (p. 29)

Appears when the transceiver is ready for direct fre-

quency entry.

•This indicator appears when [(F-INP)ENT] key on the

HM-151 is pushed.

!0!2 !1 @4 @2

!5a

!5b

!3!4 @3

■ Function display

ACC 1 ACC 2

q FSKK t AF

w GND y SQLS

e HSEND u 13.8 V

r MOD i ALC

q 8 V t ALC

w GND

y VSEND

e HSEND

u 13.8 V

r NC (BAND*)

1234

765

10 11 12

Connect to ACC socket

• When connecting the ACC conversion cable (OPC-599)

* See p. 140 for details

PANEL DESCRIPTION

!1 SPLIT INDICATOR (pgs. 89, 90)

Appears during split operation.

!2 IF FILTER INDICATOR (p. 75)

Shows the selected IF ﬁlter number.

!3 PASSBAND WIDTH INDICATOR (p. 75, 77)

Graphically displays the passband width for twin

PBT operation and center frequency for IF shift op-

eration.

!4 MODE INDICATORS (p. 34)

Shows the selected operating mode.

• “-R” appears when CW reverse or RTTY reverse mode

is selected.

!5 PROGRAMMABLE/1 MHz TUNING STEP

INDICATORS

➥ !5a appears when the 1 MHz quick tuning step is

selected. (p. 31)

➥ !5b appears when the programmable tuning step

is selected. (p. 30)

!6 FUNCTION INDICATORS

➥ “” appears when the VOX function is acti-

vated. (p. 83)

➥ “” appears when full break-in operation is se-

lected and “ ” appears when semi break-in

operation is selected. (p. 85)

➥ “” appears when the speech compressor is

activated. (p. 87)

➥ “ ,” “ ,” “ ” or “ ” (OFF)

appears when the fast time constant, middle time

constant, slow time constant or AGC OFF is se-

lected, respectively. (p. 74)

➥ “”appears when the VSC (Voice Squelch

Control) function is activated in phone (SSB, AM,

FM, WFM) modes. (p. 82)

➥ “” appears for negative offset and “ ”

appears for positive offset during duplex opera-

tion. (p. 63)

➥ “”appears when the 9600 baud mode is ac-

tivated for packet operation. (p. 116)

➥ “” appears when the preamp is ON,

“”appears when the 12 dB attenuator is

ON. (p. 72)

➥ “” or “ ” appears when the RIT or ∂TX

function is activated. (pgs. 73, 86)

➥ “” appears when the noise blanker is acti-

vated. (p. 78)

➥ “”appears when DSP noise reduction is acti-

vated. (p. 79)

➥ “” appears when the manual notch function is

activated. (p. 81)

➥ “”appears when the automatic notch function

is activated. (p. 80)

!7 MULTI-FUNCTION SCREEN

Shows the screens for the multi-function meter, sim-

ple band scope, SWR meter, memory channel,

voice recorder, memory keyer, DTMF memory en-

coder, RTTY decoder, IF ﬁlter selection or popup in-

dication, etc.

!8 PRIORITY WATCH INDICATOR (p. 113)

Appears while priority scan is activated.

!9 SELECT MEMORY CHANNEL INDICATOR

(p. 113)

Appears when select scan is enabled for the se-

lected memory channel.

@0 1/4 FUNCTION INDICATOR (p. 32)

Appears when the

⁄4-speed tuning function is acti-

vated in CW and RTTY modes.

@1 EXTERNAL KEYPAD INDICATOR

Shows the memory keyer or voice memory channel

number. This indication appears when “

EExxtteerrnnaall

KKeeyyppaadd ((VVOOIICCEE))

” or “

EExxtteerrnnaall KKeeyyppaadd

((KKEEYYEERR))

” in the miscellaneous (others) set mode

(p. 135) is set to ON, and which one is activated.

•“”appears when the memory keyer “M2” is trans-

mitted.

•“”appears when the voice memory “T1” is transmit-

ted.

@2 CLOCK READOUT (p. 117)

Shows the current time.

•UTC time or local time can be selected.

@3 TONE INDICATOR (pgs. 60,, 61, 64)

Appears during FM tone operation.

•“ ,”“ ” or “ ” appears when the repeater

tone, tone squelch, DTCS squelch are activated, re-

spectively.

@4 TUNER INDICATOR (pgs. 114, 115)

Appears when the optional automatic antenna tuner

is activated.

•This indicator blinks while the tuner is tuning.

∂TX

RIT

INSTALLATION AND CONNECTIONS

■ Unpacking

After unpacking, immediately report any damage to the

delivering carrier or dealer. Keep the shipping cartons.

For a description and a diagram of accessory equip-

ment included with the IC-7000, see ‘Supplied acces-

sories’ on p. i-1 of this manual.

■ Selecting a location

Select a location for the transceiver that allows ade-

quate air circulation, free from extreme heat, cold, or

vibrations, and away from TV sets, TV antenna ele-

ments, radios and other electromagnetic sources.

The base of the transceiver has an adjustable stand

for desktop use. Set the stand to one of two angles de-

pending on your operating conditions. (see description

on right hand page)

■ Grounding

To prevent electrical shock, television interference

(TVI), broadcast interference (BCI) and other prob-

lems, ground the transceiver through the GROUND

terminal on the rear panel.

For best results, connect a heavy gauge wire or strap

to a long, buried copper rod. Make the distance be-

tween the [GND] terminal and ground as short as pos-

sible.

R WARNING: NEVER connect the [GND] ter-

minal to a gas pipe or electric conduit, since the

connection could cause an explosion or electric

shock.

■ Antenna connection

For radio communications the antenna is of critical im-

portance for output power and sensitivity. Use well-

matched 50-ohm antennas and coaxial feedline. An

SWR (standing wave radio) of 1.5:1 or lower is recom-

mended when transmitting.

CAUTION: Protect your transceiver from lightning

by using a lightning arrestor.

ANTENNA SWR

Each antenna is tuned for a specified frequency

range and SWR increases outside that range. When

the SWR is higher than approx. 2.0:1, the trans-

ceiver’s power drops to protect the ﬁnal transistors.

In this case, an antenna tuner is used to match the

transceiver and antenna. Low SWR allows full power

for transmitting even when using the antenna tuner.

The IC-7000 has an SWR meter to monitor the an-

tenna SWR continuously.

30 mm

10 mm (soft solder)

10 mm

1–2 mm

solder solder

Soft

solder

Coupling ring

PL-259 CONNECTOR INSTALLATION EXAMPLE

Slide the coupling ring

down. Strip the cable

jacket and soft solder.

Slide the connector

body on and solder it.

Screw the coupling

ring onto the connector

body.

Strip the cable as

shown at left. Soft

solder the center con-

ductor.

INSTALLATION AND CONNECTIONS

■ Installation

D Single body mounting D Stand

*CAUTION: Non-supplied screws (longer than 8 mm)

may damage the internal units.

MB-62

(optional)

Supplied with

the MB-62*

Nut

Spring washer

Flat washer

Pull back

then up

D Front panel separation

D Front panel mounting

q While pulling the front panel latch towards you,

slide the front panel to the left (ﬁg. 1).

w Attach the optional OPC-1443 to the main body

and tighten the supplied screw as in ﬁg. 2.

e Attach the other end of the OPC-1443 to the de-

tached front panel as in ﬁg. 3.

CAUTION: NEVER detach/attach the front panel

when connecting the DC power supply (or battery).

Be sure to disconnect the DC power cable from the

[13.8 V] socket on the transceiver rear panel.

q Attach the MB-105 to a ﬂat surface using the four

supplied screws (ﬁg. 1).

w Fix the detached front panel to the MB-105 as il-

lustrated in ﬁg. 2.

BE CAREFUL to mount the MB-105 so that the

front panel attaches with the correct side up.

Separation cable

(OPC-1443)

Separation cable

(OPC-1443)

To remove

fig. 1

fig. 2 fig. 3

Latch

fig. 1

fig. 2

To raise the stand:

With the transceiver upside down, pull the stand to-

wards the rear panel and then upwards, as illus-

trated below.

INSTALLATION AND CONNECTIONS

■ Required connections

KEY ACC DATA

MIC

ANT2 ANT1

DC 13.8V

GND

MICROPHONE (p. 10)

HF/50 MHz ANTENNA

GROUND (p. 15)

HM-151

RTTY TERMINAL

UNIT (p. 23)

Use the heaviest

gauge wire or strap

available and make

the connection as

short as possible.

Grounding prevents

electrical shocks, TVI

and other problems.

2 m/70 cm ANTENNA

STRAIGHT KEY

DC POWER SUPPLY (p.19)

A DC power supplyAC outlet

13.8 V; at least 25 A

Black

Red

INSTALLATION AND CONNECTIONS

■ Advanced connections

KEY ACC DATA

MIC

ANT2 ANT1

DC 13.8V

GND

OPC-589 (p. 150)

DESKTOP (p. 149)

MICROPHONE

SPEAKER

ACC SOCKET (p. 12)

DATA SOCKET (p. 12)

VIDEO OUT

AH-4

(p. 20)

AH-2b

EXTERNAL

SPEAKER (p. 149)

HEADPHONES

SP-7/SP-10

SM-20

REMOTE (p. 142)

Used for computer control and transceive

operation.

Selectable with the

[PHONE/SPEAKER]

switch on the back of

the front panel.

6-pin mini DIN socket to

connect to a TNC, etc. for

packet operation.

to [VOUT] jack

3.5(d) mm

GND

Vout

INSTALLATION AND CONNECTIONS

■ Power supply connections

Use the DC power supply with a 25 A capacity when

operating the transceiver with AC power. Refer to the

diagrams below.

CAUTION: Before connecting the DC power

cable, check the following important items. Make

sure:

•The [POWER] switch is OFF.

•Output voltage of the power source is 12–15 V.

•DC power cable polarity is correct.

Red : positive + terminal

Black : negative _ terminal

For European versions

Transceiver

A DC power supply

AC outlet

AC cable

30 A fuses

Supplied DC

power cable

13.8 V; at least 25 A

Black

Red

Transceiver

DC power

socket

DC power

socket

Connect to

power supply

[GND]

OPC-1457R

■ Battery connections

•RWARNING NEVER

connect to a battery

without supplying a DC fuse, otherwise a fire

hazard occurs.

•NEVER connect the transceiver directly to a 24V

battery.

The transceiver may not receive well on some

frequencies when installed in a hybrid vehicle, or

any type of electric vehicle (fuel cell vehicle). This

is because vehicle’s electric components such as

the inverter system generate a lot of electric noise.

•DO NOT use a cigarette lighter socket as a power

source when operating in a vehicle. The plug may

cause voltage drops and ignition noise may be su-

perimposed onto transmit or receive audio.

•Use a rubber grommet when passing the DC

power cable through a metal plate to prevent a

short circuit.

IMPORTANT!

Detailed installation notes for Icom mobile trans-

ceivers to be ﬁtted into vehicles are available. Con-

tact your Icom dealer or distributor.

Grommet

CONNECTING A VEHICLE BATTERY

Note:

Use terminals for

the cable connections.

Crimp

Solder

Supplied

DC power cable

red

black

12 V

battery

■ Connecting a DC power supply

INSTALLATION AND CONNECTIONS

■ External antenna tuners

Ground

Long wire or optional AH-2b

AH-4

ANT1

IC-7000

Coaxial cable

(from the AH-4)

CONNECTING THE AH-4

CONNECTING THE AT-180

•Turn the IC-7000’s power OFF when connecting

the AT-180, otherwise, the CPU may malfunction

and the AT-180 may not function properly.

•The OPC-742 is required when using both the AT-

180 and a 2m/70cm linear ampliﬁer.

•Do not connect [ANT2] to the AT-180. When using

an HF to 2m/70cm dual or wide-band antenna,

use a duplexer between the AT-180 and antenna

since 2 m/70 cm signals do not pass through the

AT-180.

[ANT 1]

Transceiver

Duplexer

HF to 2 m/70 cm

antenna

AT-180

[ANT 2]

IC-7000

Ground

AT-180

to 6 m

antenna

[TRANSCEIVER]

[ANT][ANT1][ACC] [ACC]

ACC cable supplied with the AT-180

Coaxial cable supplied

with the AT-180

Either of the two

external connectors

INSTALLATION AND CONNECTIONS

■ Linear ampliﬁer connections

Use the [ANT1] connector when connecting an HF/50

MHz linear ampliﬁer.

CONNECTING THE IC-PW1/EURO

To an

antenna

ACC-1

ANT

ANT1

ACC

INPUT1

REMOTE

EXCITER

1&2

GND

IC-PW1/EURO

AC outlet

Non-European versions: 100–120/220–240 V

European version : 230 V

Ground

Transceiver

REMOTE

Remote control cable (supplied with the IC-PW1/EURO)

ACC cable (supplied with the IC-PW1/EURO)

Coaxial cable

(supplied with the IC-PW1/EURO)

7-pin side

OPC-599 conversion cable

()

CONNECTING A NON-ICOM LINEAR AMPLIFIER

R WARNING:

•Set the transceiver output power and linear ampli-

ﬁer ALC output level referring to the linear ampli-

ﬁer instruction manual. Be sure the linear ampli-

fier keying circuit control voltage is compatible

with the IC-7000, before connecting to the

HSEND line (ACC cable).

•The ALC input level must be in the range 0 V to

–4 V, and the transceiver does not accept positive

voltage. Non-matched ALC and RF power settings

could cause a ﬁre or damage the linear ampliﬁer.

•The IC-7000 SEND line (ACC connector pin 3) is

rate at 16 V/200 mA DC. If this level is exceeded,

a larger external relay must be used.

HSEND

(Orange)

ALC (Blue)

13.8V (Gray)

Ground

GND

Relay

RF INRF OUT

ALC

KEY

ANT1

ACC cable

ACC

Transceiver

50 Ω coaxial cable

To an

antenna

INSTALLATION AND CONNECTIONS

Rear panel

Paddle

[KEY]

[MICROPHONE]

Straight key

Microphone (HM-103)

Keyer set mode setting

Keyer set mode (p. 49)

[ACC]

123

765

10 11

For no break-in operation:

Connect an external switch

such as a foot switch; or use

the RTTY SEND terminal for

all bands. (See p. 23)

See p. 50 for connection details:

Paddle operation from [MIC]

connector

Normal

Reverse

Bug

Paddle polarity

Normal

MIC U/D keyer (HM-103)

Keyer Type

ELEC-KEY

Paddle polarity

Normal

Keyer Type

Straight

Paddle polarity

Normal

Keyer Type

ELEC-KEY

Paddle polarity

Reverse

Keyer Type

ELEC-KEY

Paddle polarity

Normal

Keyer Type

BUG-KEY

■ Connections for CW

INSTALLATION AND CONNECTIONS

[ACC]

Rear panel

123

765

10 11

[RTTY] [EXT SP]

Personal computer

Rear panel

view

Connect SQL line when required.

eHF/50 MHz: orange

u144/430 MHz: purple

SQL*

(light green)

FSKK (black)

AF out (light blue)

MSEND*

GND (red)

TNC or PC interface

for the RTTY software

Colors refer to the wires in

the supplied ACC cable.

GND

3-conductor

/8˝ plug (supplied)

2-conductor

/8˝ plug

FSKK

SEND

D Connections for RTTY (FSK)

D Connections for RTTY (AFSK)

[MIC][ACC]

Rear panel

i SQL*

!2 AF out (light blue)

PTT

GND

MIC

GND

Rear panel

view

Personal computer

123

765

10 11

Rear panel

view

Connect SQL line when required.

TNC or PC interface

for the RTTY software

Colors refer to the wires in

the supplied ACC cable.

■ Connections for RTTY

INSTALLATION AND CONNECTIONS

■ Connections for packet, SSTV or PSK31

D When connecting to [DATA] socket

D When connecting to [MIC] connector

D When connecting to [ACC] socket

[MIC][ACC]

Rear panel

i SQL*

!2 AF out (light blue)

PTT

GND

MIC

GND

Rear panel

view

Personal computer

123

765

10 11

Rear panel

view

Connect SQL line when required.

TNC or

PC interface for the software

Colors refer to the wires in

the supplied ACC cable.

[DATA] (Rear panel)

Personal computer

TNC or

PC interface for the software

RS-232C

PTT

PTTP

DATA IN

SQL

RX AUDIO

GND

TX AUDIO

AF OUT

DATA OUT

GND

SQL*

Connect SQL line when required.

[ACC]

Rear panel

123

765

10 11

Rear panel

view

Connect SQL line when required.

SQL*

(light green)

AF in (pink)

AF out (light blue)

MSEND*

GND (red)

Personal computer

eHF/50 MHz: orange

u144/430 MHz: purple

TNC or

PC interface for the software

Colors refer to the wires in

the supplied ACC cable.

BASIC OPERATION

■ When ﬁrst applying power (CPU resetting)

Before first applying power, make sure all connec-

tions required for your system are complete by refer-

ring to Chapter 2. Then, reset the transceiver using

the following procedure.

Resetting CLEARS all programmed contents in

memory channels and returns default values in set

mode.

q Make sure the transceiver power is OFF.

w While pushing and holding [

(

BAND

)] and

[

(

BAND

)], push [PWR] to start resetting.

•The internal CPU is reset.

•The display changes to ‘ALL CLEAR,’ ‘RF power 100%’

and ‘Initial frequency and Mode’ as shown at right.

The transceiver’s

initial frequency and mode

[PWR]

[Y]

[Z]

[RF/SQL]: Center

[LOCK]: OFF

[POWER]: OFF

[AF]: Max. CCW

[PBT]: Center

(Push and hold for 1 sec.)

[PBT/M-ch/RIT]

: PBT

(indicator lights)

CCW : counterclockwise

D Menu resetting (

)

Turn power ON, then check the display. If any of the

following indicators appear, turn them OFF as follows:

•Tuning step indicators,

, (SSB, CW or RTTY):

Push [TS].

•MHz tuning step indicator,

, (FM, WFM or AM):

Push [TS]

•1 Hz frequency readout (SSB, CW or RTTY):

Push and hold [TS].

•Preamp indicator, :

Push [P.AMP/ATT]

•Attenuator indicator, :

Push [P.AMP/ATT]

•Noise blanker indicator, :

Push [NB/ADJ]

•Noise reduction indicator, :

Push [NR/LEV]

•Manual notch indicator, :

Push [MNF/ADJ]

•Auto notch indicator, :

Push [ANF/

•

REC]

•Memory mode indicator, MEMO:

Use [F-4

VV//MM

] in the

menu (p. 27).

•Split indicator, :

Use [F-1

SSPPLL

] in the

menu (p. 89).

If you can’t ﬁgure out how to return to menu

While pushing and holding either [

(

GRP

)] or

[

(

GRP

)], turn power ON.

•The other groups are also reset to

(Scope) at

this time.

[PWR]

[MENU/GRP]

After resetting the transceiver, set controls and

switches as shown in the diagram below.

■ Initial settings

D Differences between VFO and memory mode

VFO MODE

Each VFO shows a frequency and operating mode. If

the frequency or operating mode is changed, the VFO

automatically memorizes the new frequency or oper-

ating mode.

When VFO settings are changed with frequency and

mode from another VFO or memory mode, the last-

used frequency and operating mode for that VFO ap-

pear.

[EXAMPLE]

MEMORY MODE (pgs. 100–108)

Each memory channel shows a frequency and oper-

ating mode like a VFO. Even if the frequency or mode

is changed, the memory channel does not memorize

the new frequency or operating mode.

When a memory channel is changed with frequency

and mode from another memory channel or VFO

mode, the memorized frequency and operating mode

appear.

[EXAMPLE]

BASIC OPERATION

VFO is an abbreviation of Variable Frequency Oscilla-

tor, and traditionally refers to an oscillator.

The IC-7000 VFO is somewhat different. The VFO dis-

play of the IC-7000 acts like a computer’s window and

can show one frequency and one operating mode.

You can call up a desired frequency to the VFO with

the memo pad-read key (p. 110) or the memory trans-

fer function (p. 107). You can also change the fre-

quency with [DIAL] and select an operating mode with

[MODE] key or call up previously accessed frequency

and modes with the band stacking register (p. 28).

The IC-7000 has two VFOs, specially suited for split

frequency operation. The VFOs are called VFO A and

VFO B. You can use the desired VFO to call up a fre-

quency and operating mode for operation.

VFO

MODE

KEY

Select

MEMORY

CHANNEL

DIAL

MEMO PAD

28.025 MHz

7.001 MHz

21.295 MHz

BAND

Change

Transfer

Transfer Transfer

Changed frequency (14.123 MHz) does not appear and

memorized frequency (14.100 MHz) appears instead.

Memory channel 1 is

selected.

The frequency is changed.

Memory channel 1 is

selected again.

Another memory channel

is selected.

VFO is selected.

The frequency is changed.

VFO is selected again.

Changed frequency (14.123 MHz) appears.

Memory mode is selected.

■ VFO description

■ Selecting VFO/memory mode

BASIC OPERATION

q Select

w Push [F-2

AA//BB

] to toggle VFO A or VFO B.

[MENU/GRP] [F-2]

Either “ ” or “ ” appears.

Selecting VFO A/VFO B

q Select

w Push and hold [F-2

AA//BB

] for 1 sec. to set the

undisplayed VFO frequency and mode to those of

the displayed VFO.

•Three beeps sound when the VFO equalization is com-

pleted.

CONVENIENT

Use two VFOs as a quick memory

When you find a new station, but you wish to continue

searching, the Two-VFO system can be used for quick

memory storage.

q Push [F-2

AA//BB

] for 1 sec. to store the displayed fre-

quency into the undisplayed VFO.

w Continue searching for stations.

e Push [F-2

AA//BB

] to retrieve the stored frequency.

r To continue searching for a station, push [F-2

AA//BB

]

again.

Push

then push again.

for 1 sec.,

VFO equalization

■ VFO operation

q Select

w Push [F-4

VV//MM

] to toggle VFO and memory

modes.

“VFO” indicator

Memory channel

indicator

[MENU/GRP] [F-4]

Menu group selection

Push [MENU/GRP] for 1 sec.

Selection from:

(Graphic)

Menu selection (Example: M)

Push [MENU/GRP] momentarily.

Selection from:

Either

Y or Z

Either

Y or Z

BASIC OPERATION

The triple band stacking register provides 3 memories

in one band. 3 sets of frequency and operating mode

on each band are automatically stored when used.

If a band key (on the HM-151) is pushed once, the last

used frequency and operating mode on that band are

called up. When the key is pushed again, another

stored frequency and operating mode are called up.

This function is convenient when you operate 3 oper-

ating modes on one band. For example, one register

is used for a CW frequency, another for an SSB fre-

quency and the other one for an RTTY frequency.

See the table below for a list of the bands available

and the default settings for each band.

SPCH

/LOCK

TUNER

/CALL

XFC

V/M

F-1

F-2

FIL

MODE

GENE

123

456

789

F-INP

ENT

1.8 3.5 7

10 14 18

21 24 28

50 144 430

Band keys

HM-151

■ Selecting an operating band

BAND REGISTER 1 REGISTER 2 REGISTER 3

1.8 MHz 1.900000 MHz CW 1.910000 MHz CW 1.915000 MHz CW

3.5 MHz 3.550000 MHz LSB 3.560000 MHz LSB 3.580000 MHz LSB

7 MHz 7.050000 MHz LSB 7.060000 MHz LSB 7.020000 MHz CW

10 MHz 10.120000 MHz CW 10.130000 MHz CW 10.140000 MHz CW

14 MHz 14.100000 MHz USB 14.200000 MHz USB 14.050000 MHz CW

18 MHz 18.100000 MHz USB 18.130000 MHz USB 18.150000 MHz USB

21 MHz 21.200000 MHz USB 21.300000 MHz USB 21.050000 MHz CW

24 MHz 24.950000 MHz USB 24.980000 MHz USB 24.900000 MHz CW

28 MHz 28.500000 MHz USB 29.500000 MHz USB 28.100000 MHz CW

50 MHz 50.100000 MHz USB 50.200000 MHz USB 51.000000 MHz FM

144 MHz 145.000000 MHz FM 145.100000 MHz FM 145.200000 MHz FM

430 MHz 433.000000 MHz FM 433.100000 MHz FM 433.200000 MHz FM

General 15.000000 MHz USB 15.100000 MHz USB 15.200000 MHz USB

q Push [(14)5], then select a frequency and an oper-

ating mode.

•Frequency and operating mode are memorized in the

ﬁrst band stacking register.

w Push [(14)5] again, then select another frequency

and operating mode.

•This frequency and operating mode are memorized in

the second band stacking register.

e Push [(14)5] again, then select another frequency

and operating mode.

•This frequency and operating mode are memorized in

the third band stacking register.

•When a fourth frequency and operating mode are se-

lected on a band, the ﬁrst register set in step q, is over

written.

SPCH

/LOCK

TUNER

/CALL

XFC

V/M

F-1

F-2

FIL

MODE

GENE

123

456

789

F-INP

ENT

1.8 3.5 7

10 14 18

21 24 28

50 144 430

FIL

MODE

GENE

123

4 5 6

789

F-INP

ENT

1.8 3.5 7

10 14 18

21 24 28

50 144 430

[Example]: 14 MHz band

HM-151

Using the band stacking registers

BASIC OPERATION

The transceiver has several tuning methods for conve-

nient frequency tuning.

■ Frequency setting

Tuning with the main dial

q Push [

(

BAND

)] or [

(

BAND

)] to select the desired

band. Or push the desired band key on the micro-

phone 1–3 times.

•Three different frequencies can be selected on each

band with the microphone’s band key. (See previous

page “Using the band stacking register.”)

w Rotate [DIAL] to set the desired frequency.

If the dial lock function is activated, “ ” indicator

lights, and [DIAL] does not function. In this case,

push [SPCH/LOCK] to deactivate the lock func-

tion. (p. 37)

SPCH

/LOCK

TUNER

/CALL

XFC

V/M

F-1

F-2

FIL

MODE

GENE

123

456

789

F-INP

ENT

1.8 3.5 7

10 14 18

21 24 28

50 144 430

Band keys

HM-151

[Y]

[Z]

[DIAL]

Direct frequency entry with the microphone’s keypad

The HM-151 has a keypad for direct frequency entry

as described right.

q Push [F-INP/ENT].

•“ ” appears.

w Input the desired frequency.

•Push [(50)•] to input “• (decimal point)” between the

MHz digits and kHz digits.

e Push [F-INP/ENT] to set the input frequency.

•To cancel the input, push [CE] instead of [F-INP/ENT].

[EXAMPLES]

F-INP

ENT

F-INP

ENT

F-INP

ENT

F-INP

ENT

F-INP

ENT

F-INP

ENT

F-INP

ENT

F-INP

ENT

F-INP

ENT

F-INP

ENT

F-INP

ENT

1.8

3.5

F-INP

ENT

144

21.280 21.245

14.025 MHz

18.0725 MHz

706 kHz

5.100 MHz

7.000 MHz

SPCH

/LOCK

TUNER

/CALL

XFC

V/M

F-1

F-2

FIL

MODE

GENE

123

456

789

F-INP

ENT

1.8 3.5 7

10 14 18

21 24 28

50 144 430

Keypad

HM-151

BASIC OPERATION

Programmable tuning step

The operating frequency can be changed in steps of

(0.01 (AM/FM/WFM only), 0.1, 1, 5, 9, 10, 12.5, 20,

25 or 100 kHz selectable) for quick tuning.

q Push [TS] momentarily to turn the programmable

tuning function ON.

•“Z” appears when the programmable tuning function is

ON.

w Rotate [DIAL] to change the frequency in pro-

grammed kHz steps.

e Push [TS] again to turn the programmable tuning

function OFF.

•“Z” disappears.

r Rotate [DIAL] for normal tuning, if desired.

Programmable tuning step indicator

[TS] [DIAL]

Appears

Selecting “kHz” step

Programmable tuning steps are available to suit your

operating requirements.

These tuning steps are:

•Independently selectable for each mode

•Selectable from 0.01 (AM/FM/WFM only), 0.1, 1, 5,

9, 10, 12.5, 20, 25 and 100 kHz

q Push [TS] momentarily to turn the programmable

tuning step ON.

•“Z” appears when the programmable tuning function is

ON.

w Push and hold [TS] for 1 sec. to enter the tuning

step setting display.

•The tuning step setting for the selected mode appears.

e Select the desired operating mode with [MODE].

(see p. 34)

r Rotate [DIAL] to select the desired tuning step

from 0.01 (FM/WFM/AM only), 0.1, 1, 5, 9, 10,

12.5, 20, 25 or 100 kHz.

•Push and hold [F-4

DDEEFF

] for 1 sec. to return to the de-

fault setting, if desired.

t Repeat steps e and r to select the “kHz” tuning

steps for other modes, if desired.

y Push [TS] (or [

(

GRP

)]) to exit the setting

display.

Appears

[TS][MODE] [DIAL]

BASIC OPERATION

When neither the quick tuning step or programmable

tuning step “

” appear, rotating [DIAL] changes the

frequency in increments of 1 or 10 Hz. These tuning

steps are only available in SSB, CW and RTTY

modes.

q Select SSB, CW or RTTY mode if necessary.

w Push and hold [TS] for 1 sec. to toggle between

the 1 Hz and 10 Hz step settings.

•When the 1 Hz step is selected, the 1 Hz digit appears

in the frequency indication; when the 10 Hz step is se-

lected, the 1 Hz digit disappears from the frequency in-

dication.

•Rotating [DIAL] changes the frequency in 1 Hz or 10Hz

tuning step.

Push and hold

for 1 sec.

Rotating [DIAL] changes the

frequency in 1 Hz steps.

Rotating [DIAL] changes the

frequency in 10 Hz steps.

[TS][MODE] [DIAL]

Selecting 1 Hz or 10 Hz step (SSB/CW/RTTY only)

The quick tuning step function allows you to change

the frequency in 1 MHz steps when rotating [DIAL].

This function is only available in FM, WFM and AM

modes.

q Select FM, WFM or AM mode if necessary.

w Push [TS] momentarily to toggle between the 1

MHz tuning step and the programmable tuning

step.

•“

” appears above the 1 MHz indicator when the 1

MHz tuning step is selected.

•Rotating [DIAL] changes the frequency 1 MHz.

Quick tuning step indicator

Rotating [DIAL]

changes the frequency

in 1 MHz steps.

[TS][MODE] [DIAL]

Appears

1 MHz quick tuning step (FM/WFM/AM only)

BASIC OPERATION

• [TS] switch flow chart

SSB/CW/RTTY modes Any mode FM/WFM/AM modes

1 Hz tuning

10 Hz tuning

momentarily momentarily

1 MHz tuning

Programmable step tuning

SSB/CW/RTTY modes (0.1 kHz –100 kHz)

FM/WFM/AM modes (0.01 kHz–100 kHz)

momentarily

Push

Push Push

1 sec.

Selectable for each mode.

Appears Appears

Appears

⁄4

tuning function (CW/RTTY only)

While operating in CW/RTTY, the

⁄4 tuning function is

available for critical tuning. Dial sensitivity is reduced

⁄4 of normal when the

⁄4 function is in use.

q Select

w Push [F-2

11//44

] to toggle the

⁄4 function ON and

OFF.

•“ ” indication appears when the function is in

use.

NOTE:

This function is only available when the pro-

grammable tuning step is OFF (p. 30).

[MENU/GRP] [F-2]

Appears

•Push and hold [MENU/GRP] for 1 sec. once or twice

to select the menu group

•Push [MENU/GRP] momentarily one or more times to

select the menu

BASIC OPERATION

■ Volume setting

Rotate [AF] control clockwise to increase; counter-

clockwise to decrease the audio output level.

• Set a suitable audio level.

[AF]

Audio outut

decreases

Audio output

increases

D Band edge warning beep

When selecting a frequency that lies outside of a

band’s specified frequency range, a warning beep

sounds.

This function can be turned OFF in set mode, if de-

sired.

q Enter the miscellaneous (others) set mode as

above.

w Push [F-1

≤≤

] or [F-2

≥≥

] to select “

BBeeeepp ((BBaanndd

EEddggee))

,” then rotate [DIAL] to select the desired

setting.

•Push [F-4

DDEEFF

] for 1 sec. to return to default setting.

e Push [

(

GRP

)] twice to return the normal op-

erating mode.

Auto tuning step function

When rotating the tuning dial rapidly, the tuning speed

accelerates automatically as selected.

q Push [AF(

SET

)] momentarily to enter the set mode

menu.

w Push [F-4

OOTTHH

] to enter the miscellaneous (oth-

ers) set mode.

e Push [F-1

≤≤

] or [F-2

≥≥

] to select “

MMAAIINN DDIIAALL

AAuuttoo TTSS

.”

r Rotate [DIAL] to select the desired tuning speed

from high, low and OFF.

•HIGH: Approx. 5 times faster

•LOW : Approx. twice faster

•OFF : Auto tuning step is turned OFF

•Push [F-4

DDEEFF

] for 1 sec. to return to default setting.

t Push [

(

GRP

)] twice to return to the normal

operating mode.

[DIAL][MENU/GRP]

[AF]

[F-1] [F-2] [F-4]

BASIC OPERATION

■ Operating mode selection

The following modes are available in the IC-7000:

SSB (LSB/USB), CW, CW-R (CW reverse), RTTY,

RTTY-R (RTTY reverse), AM, FM and WFM (receive

only).

To select the desired mode of operation, push

[MODE] one or more times, then push [MODE] for

1 sec., if necessary. See the diagram at right for the

order of selection.

•The selected mode is indicated in the function display.

NOTE:

If a desired mode cannot be selected, it

may be hidden because of a setting in the miscel-

laneous (others) set mode (pgs. 134, 135).

SPCH

/LOCK

TUNER

/CALL

XFC

V/M

F-1

F-2

FIL

MODE

GENE

123

456

789

F-INP

ENT

1.8 3.5 7

10 14 18

21 24 28

50 144 430

HM-151

MODE

OPERATING MODE SELECTION

Push

momentarily

Push and hold

for 1 sec.

USB LSB

AM FM WFM

CW CW-R

RTTY-R

RTTY

[MODE]

■ Voice synthesizer function

The IC-7000 has a voice synthesizer function. This

function announces the S-meter level, operating fre-

quency and mode (S-meter level’s announcement

can be deactivated—p. 132) in a clear, electronically

generated voice, in English (or Japanese).

q Select the desired parameters to be announced,

such as Audio level, speed, language, contents, in

the miscellaneous (others) set mode. (p. 131)

w Push [SPCH/LOCK] momentarily to announce the

selected contents.

•Push [SPCH/LOCK] momentarily to stop the an-

nouncement.

[SPCH/LOCK]

BASIC OPERATION

■ Squelch and receive (RF) sensitivity

[RF/SQL] adjusts the RF gain and squelch threshold

level. The squelch removes noise output from the

speaker (closed position) when no signal is received.

•The squelch is particularly effective for FM. It is also avail-

able for other modes.

•The 12 to 1 o’clock position is recommended for any set-

ting of the [RF/SQL] control.

•The control can be set as ‘Auto’ (RF gain control in SSB,

CW and RTTY; squelch control in AM, FM and WFM (RF

gain is fixed at maximum) in the miscellaneous (others)

set mode as follows (p. 129).

Adjusting RF gain (Receive sensitivity)

Normally, [RF/SQL] is set to the 11 o’clock position.

Rotate [RF/SQL] to the 11 o’clock position for maxi-

mum sensitivity.

•Rotating counterclockwise from the maximum position re-

duces sensitivity.

•The S-meter indicates receive sensitivity.

Adjusting squelch (Removing non-signal noise)

Rotate [RF/SQL] clockwise when receiving no signal,

until the noise just disappears.

•[RX] indicator light goes out.

•Rotating [RF/SQL] past the threshold point invokes the S-

meter squelch—this allows you to set a minimum signal

level needed to open the squelch.

•When functioning as RF gain/squelch control

•When functioning as RF gain control

(Squelch is ﬁxed open; SSB, CW, RTTY only)

•When functioning as squelch control (RF gain is

ﬁxed at maximum)

While rotating the RF gain control, noise may be

heard. This comes from the DSP unit and does not

indicate an equipment malfunction.

Squelch is

open.

S-meter

squelch

S-meter squelch

threshold

Noise squelch

threshold

(FM mode)

Lowest threshold Highest threshold

Noise squelch (FM mode)

Minimum RF gain

Adjustable

range

Maximum RF gain

Recommended level

RF gain

adjustable

range

Maximum

RF gain

S-meter shows

squelch level

Noise squelch (FM mode)

Squelch is

open.

[RF/SQL]

SETTING OPERATION

RF+SQL

Can be used in all modes.

(default)

Functions as noise squelch or S-meter

squelch in FM mode; S-meter squelch

only in other modes.

SQL

Operates as a squelch control.

•RF gain is ﬁxed at maximum sensitivity.

Operates as an RF gain control in

SSB, CW and RTTY modes.

AUTO

•Squelch is ﬁxed open.

Operates as a squelch control in AM,

FM and WFM modes.

•RF gain is ﬁxed at maximum sensitivity.

D Multi-function meter

BASIC OPERATION

■ Meter function

The transceiver has 4 transmit meter functions for

your convenience. Select the desired meter with the

[F-3

MMEETT

] in the

display.

q Select

w Push [F-3

MMEETT

] one or more times to select from

RF power (Po), SWR, ALC or compression level

(COM).

•The display indication changes as the table at the right.

•Push and hold [MENU/GRP] for 1 sec. once or twice

to select the menu group

•Push [MENU/GRP] momentarily one or more times to

select the menu

[MENU/GRP] [F-3]

DISPLAY

MEASUREMENT

INDICATION

Indicates the relative RF output power in %.

SWR

Indicates the SWR on the transmission

line.

ALC

Indicates the ALC level. When the meter

movement shows the input signal level ex-

ceeds the allowable level, the ALC limits

the RF power. In such cases, reduce the

MIC gain setting (see p. 38) in the quick

set mode.

COM

Indicates the compression level when the

speech compressor is in use.

In addition, the transceiver can display the multi-func-

tion meter in the graphic display, which displays all

transmit meters simultaneously.

➥ Select

(Multi-meter).

The multi-function meter also displays the internal

temperature meter.

•Push and hold [MENU/GRP] for 1 sec. once or twice

to select the menu group

•Push [MENU/GRP] momentarily one or more times to

select the menu

(Multi-meter).

[MENU/GRP]

Quick entry

➥ Push and hold [

(

BAND

)] for 1 sec. to turn the

multi-function meter ON and OFF.

•Push [

(

GRP

)] also to turn OFF.

[Z]

■ Basic transmit operation

D Transmitting

BASIC OPERATION

q Push [PTT] (microphone) to transmit.

•[TX] indicator lights red.

w Release [PTT] (microphone) to return to receive.

[TX] indicator

SPCH

/LOCK

TUNER

/CALL

XFC

V/M

F-1

F-2

FIL

MODE

GENE

123

456

789

F-INP

ENT

1.8 3.5 7

10 14 18

21 24 28

50 144 430

[PTT]

[TX]

HM-151

Before transmitting, monitor your selected op-

erating frequency to make sure transmitting

won’t cause interference to other stations on

the same frequency. It’s good Amateur practice

to listen ﬁrst. On the HF bands, even if nothing

is heard, ask “is the frequency in use” once or

twice, before you begin operating on that fre-

quency.

D Microphone lock function

This function locks microphone keypads.

➥ Push and hold [SPCH/LOCK] (microphone) for 1

sec. to toggle the microphone lock function ON

and OFF.

•“MIC LOCK ON” and “MIC LOCK OFF,” popup indica-

tors appear, respectively

•[PTT] and [SPCH/LOCK] can be used.

•All keys on the transceiver can be used.

SPCH

/LOCK

TUNER

/CALL

XFC

V/M

F-1

F-2

FIL

MODE

GENE

123

456

789

F-INP

ENT

1.8 3.5 7

10 14 18

21 24 28

50 144 430

HM-151

SPCH

/LOCK

■ Lock functions

The dial lock function prevents accidental change

caused by [DIAL].

➥ Push and hold [SPCH/LOCK] for 1 sec. to turn the

dial lock function ON and OFF.

•“ ” indicator appears while the dial lock function is

activated.

[SPCH/LOCK]

Appears

D Dial lock function

The lock function can only be activated when display-

ing frequency, not in set mode or memory channel list-

ing display.

BASIC OPERATION

q Push [AF(

SET

)] momentarily to enter the set mode

menu.

w Push [F-1

QQSS

] to enter the quick set mode.

e Push [F-1 Y] or [F-2 Z] to select “

RRFF PPoowweerr

.”

r Rotate [DIAL] to set the desired output setting.

•Output power is displayed in 1% steps (0% to 100%).

t Push [

(

GRP

)] to exit quick set mode.

•Available power

*Carrier power

[MENU/GRP] [F-2][F-1] [DIAL]

[AF]

D Setting output power

Microphone gain must be adjusted properly so that

your signal is not distorted when transmitted.

q Select SSB or another phone mode (AM or FM

mode).

w Select

e Push [F-3

MMEETT

] one or more times to select the

ALC meter.

•“ALC” appears.

r Push [AF(

SET

)] momentarily to enter the set mode

menu.

t Push [F-1

QQSS

] to enter the quick set mode.

y Push [F-1 Y] or [F-2 Z] to select “

MMIICC GGaaiinn

.”

u Push [PTT] (microphone) to transmit.

•Speak into the microphone at your normal voice level.

i While speaking into the microphone, rotate [DIAL]

so that the ALC meter reading does not go outside

the ALC zone.

•Microphone gain is adjusted in 1% steps (0% to 100%).

o Release [PTT] (microphone) to return to receive.

!0 Push [Z(

GRP

)] to exit the quick set mode.

•Push [

(

GRP

)] again to return the normal oper-

ating mode.

ALC zone

ALC

[MENU/GRP] [F-3][F-1] [F-2] [DIAL]

[AF]

•Push and hold [MENU/GRP] for 1 sec. once or twice

to select the menu group

•Push [MENU/GRP] momentarily one or more times to

select the menu

D Setting microphone gain

BAND

SSB/CW

AM*

RTTY/FM

HF 2–100 W 1–40 W

50 MHz 2-100 W 1–40 W

144 MHz 2–50 W 2–20 W

430 MHz 2–35 W 2–14 W

If a linear ampliﬁer is connected such as the IC-PW1/EURO,

set the output power using the ALC meter (see below) to

the

ALC zone (ALC meter reading should be within this zone),

otherwise the linear ampliﬁer will not work properly.

D Convenient functions for receive

RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT

■ Operating SSB

q Push [

(

BAND

)]/[

(

BAND

)] to select the desired

band or push a band key on the HM-151.

w Push [MODE] momentarily or push and hold for

1 sec. to select LSB or USB mode.

•Below 10 MHz LSB is automatically selected; above

10 MHz USB is automatically selected.

e Rotate [DIAL] to tune in a desired signal.

•The S-meter indicates received signal strength when

signal is received.

r Rotate [AF] to set audio to a comfortable listening

level.

t Push [PTT] (microphone) to transmit.

•[TX] indicator lights red.

y Speak into the microphone at your normal voice

level.

•Adjust ‘MIC Gain’ at this step, if necessary. (p. 38)

u Release [PTT] (microphone) to return to receive.

“LSB” or “USB” appears

[Y]

[Z]

[DIAL]

[MODE][AF] [TX] indicator

•Preamp and attenuator (p. 72)

➥ Push [P.AMP/ATT] momentarily to turn the pre-

amp ON or OFF.

•“ ”appears when the preamp is set to ON.

➥ Push [P.AMP/ATT] for 1 sec. to turn the attenua-

tor ON.

•Push [P.AMP/ATT] momentarily to turn the attenuator

OFF.

•“ ”appears when the attenuator is set to ON.

•Twin PBT (passband tuning) (p. 77)

➥ Push [PBT/M-ch/RIT] (switch) momentarily once

or twice to select the twin PBT ON or OFF (M-ch

RIT).

•PBT indicator lights green when the twin PBT is se-

lected.

➥ Rotate [PBT/M-ch/RIT] (controls–inner/outer).

•Push [PBT/M-ch/RIT(

CLR

)] to clear the settings.

•AGC (auto gain control) (p. 74)

➥ While “

” is selected, push [F-3

AAGGCC

] momen-

tarily one or more times to select AGC fast, AGC

middle and AGC slow.

•“ ,” “ ” and “ ” appears when the

fast time constant, middle time constant and slow

time constant is selected, respectively.

➥ While “

” is selected, push and hold [F-3

AAGGCC

]

for 1 sec. to enter the AGC set mode.

•Push [F-2

FFAASSTT

], [F-3

MMIIDD

] or [F-4

SSLLOOWW

] to select

the time constant, then rotate [DIAL] to adjust the time

constant.

•Noise blanker (p. 78)

➥ Push [NB/ADJ] to turn the noise blanker ON and

OFF.

•“ ” appears when the noise blanker is set to ON.

➥ Push and hold [NB/ADJ] for 1 sec. to enter the

noise blanker set mode, then rotate [DIAL] to ad-

just the threshold level, or noise pulse width.

•DSP noise reduction (p. 79)

➥ Push [NR/LEV] to turn the DSP noise reduction

ON and OFF.

•“ ”appears when the DSP noise reduction is ON.

➥ Push and hold [NR/LEV] for 1 sec. to enter the

DSP noise reduction level set mode, then rotate

[DIAL] to adjust the DSP noise reduction level.

•Manual notch ﬁlter (pgs. 80, 81)

➥ Push [MNF/ADJ] to turn the manual notch filter

ON and OFF.

•“ ” appears when the manual notch ﬁlter is set to ON.

➥ Push and hold [MNF/ADJ] for 1 sec. to enter the

manual notch ﬁlter set mode.

•Push [F-2

NNFF11

], [F-3

NNFF22

] to select the notch ﬁlter,

push [F-4

NNWW

] to set the ﬁlter width, rotate [DIAL] to

set the notch frequency.

•Auto notch ﬁlter (p. 80)

➥ Push [ANF/

•

REC] to turn the auto notch ﬁlter ON

and OFF.

•“ ” appears when the auto notch ﬁlter is set to ON.

•VSC (voice squelch control) (p. 82)

➥ While “

” is selected, push [F-4

VVSSCC

] to turn

the VSC function ON and OFF.

•“”appears when VSC function is set to ON.

•Push and hold [MENU/GRP] for 1 sec. once or twice

to select the menu group

•Push [MENU/GRP] momentarily one or more times

to select the menu

RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT

D Convenient functions for transmit

•Transmit quality monitor (p. 87)

➥ Push [AF(

SET

)], then [F-4

OOTTHH

] to enter the mis-

cellaneous (others) set mode. Select an item with

[F-1

≤≤

]/[F-2

≥≥

], then rotate [DIAL] to turn the

monitor function ON and OFF.

•VOX (voice operated transmit) (p. 83)

➥ While “

” is selected, push [F-1

VVOOXX

] to turn

the VOX function ON and OFF.

•“ ” appears when the VOX function is set to ON.

➥ While “

” is selected, push and hold [F-1

VVOOXX

]

for 1 sec. to enter the VOX set mode.

•Push [F-1

≤≤

]/[F-2

≥≥

] to select an item.

•Rotate [DIAL] to set the value/conditions.

•Speech compressor (p. 87)

➥ While “

” is selected, push [F-2

CCOOMM

] to turn

the speech compressor ON and OFF.

•“”appears when the speech compressor is set to

ON.

➥ While “

” is selected, push and hold [F-2

CCOOMM

]

for 1 sec. to enter the compression level set

mode.

•Rotate [DIAL] to adjust the compression level.

•Transmit ﬁlter width (p. 84)

➥ While “

” is selected, push [F-4

TTBBWW

] momen-

tarily to display the selected transmit ﬁlter width.

➥ While “

” is selected, push and hold [F-4

TTBBWW

]

for 1 sec. to select the transmit filter width from

narrow, middle and width.

•The transmit ﬁlter width window appears for showing

the selected transmit ﬁlter width each time [F-4

TTBBWW

]

is pushed.

•Push and hold [MENU/GRP] for 1 sec. once or twice

to select the menu group

•Push [MENU/GRP] momentarily one or more times

to select the menu

About 5 MHz band operation (USA version only)

Operation on the 5 MHz band is allowed on 5 discrete

frequencies and must adhere to the following:

•USB mode

•Maximum of 50 watts ERP (Effective Radiated Power)

•2.8 kHz bandwidth

It is the operator’s responsibility to set all controls so

that the transmission in this band meets the stringent

conditions under which we may use these frequencies.

NOTE: We recommend that you store these fre-

quencies, mode and ﬁlter settings into the memory

channel for easy recall.

*The channel center frequencies that are speciﬁed

by the FCC, show the center frequency of their

passband. However, the IC-7000 displays carrier

point frequency, so set 1.5 kHz below from FCC

channel center frequency.

IC-7000 Display FCC Channel

Frequency* Center Frequency*

5.33050 MHz 5.33200 MHz

5.34650 MHz 5.34800 MHz

5.36650 MHz 5.36800 MHz

5.37150 MHz 5.37300 MHz

5.40350 MHz 5.40500 MHz

To assist you in operating the 5 MHz band correctly

within the rules speciﬁed by the FCC, transmission

is impossible on any 5 MHz band frequency other

than the 5 frequencies indicated in the table above.

RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT

■ Operating CW

q Connect a paddle or straight key as on page 22.

w Push [

(

BAND

)]/[

(

BAND

)] to select the desired

band or push a band key on the HM-151.

e Push [MODE] momentarily to select CW mode.

•After CW mode is selected, push and hold [MODE] for

1 sec. to toggle between CW and CW-R modes.

r Rotate [DIAL] to tune in a desired signal with the

desired tone frequency.

t Rotate [AF] to set audio to a comfortable listening

level.

y Set CW break-in operation as semi break-in, full

break-in or OFF.

•Push [F-1

BBRRKK

] one or more times to select the CW

break-in operation.

•“ ,” “ ,” and “OFF (no indication)” appears.

➧ BK-IN: semi break-in

➧ F-BK : full break-in

➧ OFF : no break-in (ACC socket connection is neces-

sary as shown on page 22.)

u Set the CW delay time when semi break-in opera-

tion is selected.

•Push and hold [F-1

BBRRKK

] for 1 sec. to enter the break-

in delay time set mode.

•Rotate [DIAL] to set the desired delay time.

i Set CW setting in the keyer set mode (

•Push [F-2

KKEEYY

], [

(

GRP

)], then [F-4

SSEETT

] to

enter the keyer set mode. (p. 49)

o Keying to transmit, use the electric keyer or paddle

to send your CW signals.

•[TX] indicator lights red.

•The Po meter indicates transmitted CW signal strength.

!0 Stop keying to return to receive.

Delay time of 7.5 dots is selected

for semi break-in operation.

Semi break-in operation is selected.

Appears

“CW” or “CW-R” appears

[Y]

[Z]

[DIAL]

[MODE][AF] [TX] indicator

[MENU/GRP] [F-4][F-1] [F-2]

•Push and hold [MENU/GRP] for 1 sec. once or twice

to select the menu group

•Push [MENU/GRP] momentarily one or more times to

select the menu

•Push and hold [MENU/GRP] for 1 sec. once or twice

to select the menu group

•Push [MENU/GRP] momentarily one or more times to

select the menu

RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT

D Convenient functions for receive

•Preamp and attenuator (p. 72)

➥ Push [P.AMP/ATT] momentarily to turn the pre-

amp ON or OFF.

•“ ”appears when the preamp is set to ON.

➥ Push [P.AMP/ATT] for 1 sec. to turn the attenua-

tor ON.

•Push [P.AMP/ATT] momentarily to turn the attenuator

OFF.

•“ ”appears when the attenuator is set to ON.

•Twin PBT (passband tuning) (p. 77)

➥ Push [PBT/M-ch/RIT] (switch) momentarily once

or twice to select the twin PBT ON or OFF (M-ch

RIT).

•PBT indicator lights green when the twin PBT is se-

lected.

➥ Rotate [PBT/M-ch/RIT] (controls–inner/outer).

•Push [PBT/M-ch/RIT(

CLR

)] to clear the settings.

•AGC (auto gain control) (p. 74)

➥ While “

” is selected, push [F-3

AAGGCC

] momen-

tarily one or more times to select AGC fast, AGC

middle and AGC slow.

•“ ,” “ ” and “ ” appears when the

fast time constant, middle time constant and slow

time constant is selected, respectively.

➥ While “

” is selected, push and hold [F-3

AAGGCC

]

for 1 sec. to enter the AGC set mode.

•Push [F-2

FFAASSTT

], [F-3

MMIIDD

] or [F-4

SSLLOOWW

] to select

the time constant, then rotate [DIAL] to adjust the time

constant.

•Noise blanker (p. 78)

➥ Push [NB/ADJ] to turn the noise blanker ON and

OFF.

•“ ” appears when the noise blanker is set to ON.

➥ Push and hold [NB/ADJ] for 1 sec. to enter the

noise blanker set mode, then rotate [DIAL] to ad-

just the threshold level, or noise pulse width.

•DSP noise reduction (p. 79)

➥ Push [NR/LEV] to turn the DSP noise reduction

ON and OFF.

•“ ”appears when the DSP noise reduction is set to

ON.

➥ Push and hold [NR/LEV] for 1 sec. to enter the

noise reduction level set mode, then rotate [DIAL]

to adjust the DSP noise reduction level.

•Manual notch ﬁlter (pgs. 80, 81)

➥ Push [MNF/ADJ] to turn the manual notch filter

ON and OFF.

•“ ” appears when the manual notch ﬁlter is set to

ON.

➥ Push and hold [MNF/ADJ] for 1 sec. to enter the

manual notch ﬁlter set mode.

•Push [F-2

NNFF11

], [F-3

NNFF22

] to select the notch ﬁlter,

push [F-4

NNWW

] to set the ﬁlter width, rotate [DIAL] to

set the attenuated frequency.

•

⁄4 function (p. 32)

➥ While “

” is selected, push [F-2

11//44

] to turn

the

⁄4 function ON and OFF.

•“ ” indicator appears when the function is activated.

•CW pitch control (p. 44)

➥ Push [AF(

SET

)], then [F-1

QQSS

] to enter the quick

set mode. Select an item with [F-1

≤≤

]/[F-2

≥≥

then rotate [DIAL] to set the desired CW pitch

from 300 to 900 Hz in 5 Hz steps.

•Push and hold [MENU/GRP] for 1 sec. once or twice

to select the menu group

•Push [MENU/GRP] momentarily one or more times

to select the menu

•Break-in function (p. 85)

➥ While “

” is selected, push [F-1

BBRRKK

] one or

more times to select the CW break-in operation.

•“” or “ ” appears when the semi break-in or

full break-in is set to ON, respectively.

•Memory keyer function (p. 45)

➥ While “

” is selected, push [F-2

KKEEYY

] to enter

the keyer set memu.

•Push and hold [MENU/GRP] for 1 sec. once or twice

to select the menu group

•Push [MENU/GRP] momentarily one or more times

to select the menu

D Convenient functions for transmit

RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT

D CW reverse mode

The CW-R (CW Reverse) mode receives CW signals

on the reverse sideband like that of LSB and USB

modes.

Use when interference is near the desired signal and

you want to change the interference tone.

q Push [MODE] momentarily several times to select

CW mode.

Push and hold [MODE] for 1 sec. to select CW or

CW-R mode.

•Check the interference tone.

• Receive audio tone response

CW-R mode (USB side)CW mode (LSB side)

BFO

600 Hz

signal

inteference

signal

600 Hz

BFO

inteference

Push

for 1 sec.

[MODE]

CW side tone function

When the transceiver is in receive condition (and the

break-in function is OFF— p. 85) you can listen to the

tone of your CW signal without actually transmitting.

This allows you to spot your transmit signal exactly to

another station’s. This also convenient for CW prac-

tice.

q When CW (CW-R) mode is selected, enter the

quick set mode.

•Push [AF(

SET

)] momentarily to enter the set mode

menu.

•Push [F-1

QQSS

] to enter the quick set mode.

w Push [F-1

≤≤

] or [F-2

≥≥

] several times to select

“

SSiiddee TToonnee LLeevveell

,” then rotate [DIAL] to ad-

just the side tone level.

•Side tone level is adjusted in 1% steps (0% to 100%).

e Push [

(

GRP

)] to exit the quick set mode.

•Push [

(

GRP

)] again to return the normal oper-

ating mode.

[DIAL][MENU/GRP] [F-1] [F-2]

[AF]

RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT

D CW pitch control

The received CW audio pitch and monitored CW

audio pitch can be adjusted to suit your preferences

(300 to 900 Hz) without changing the operating fre-

quency.

q When CW (CW-R) mode is selected, enter the

quick set mode.

•Push [AF(

SET

)] momentarily to enter the set mode

menu.

•Push [F-1

QQSS

] to enter the quick set mode.

w Push [F-1

≤≤

] or [F-2

≥≥

] several times to select “

CCWW

PPiittcchh

,” then rotate [DIAL] to set the desired

pitch.

•CW pitch is adjusted in 5 Hz steps (300 to 900 Hz).

e Push [

(

GRP

)] to exit the quick set mode.

•Push [

(

GRP

)] again to return the normal oper-

ating mode.

•This shows the default setting for the CW pitch control

(600 Hz).

[DIAL][MENU/GRP] [F-1] [F-2]

[AF]

RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT

■ Electronic CW keyer

The IC-7000 has a number of convenient functions for

the electronic keyer that can be accessed from the

memory keyer menu.

q Push [MODE] to select CW mode.

w Select

. (See right page.)

e Push [F-2

KKEEYY

] to enter the keyer send menu.

r Push [

(

GRP

)] to select the keyer root menu.

t Push one of the multi-function keys ([F-1] to [F-4])

to select the desired menu. See the diagram below.

•Push [

(

GRP

)] to return to the previous indica-

tion.

[MODE]

[DIAL][DIAL][MENU/GRP]

[F-1]

[F-2] [F-3] [F-4]

¡Memory keyer root menu

¡Memory keyer send menu

¡Memory keyer edit menu

¡Contest number set mode

¡Keyer set mode

The memory keyer root menu can also be set

to the starting menu for keyer operation in the

miscellaneous (others) set mode. (p.134)

RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT

Pre-set messages can be sent using the memory

keyer send menu. Contents of the memory keyer are

set using the edit menu.

•Transmitting

q Select CW mode with [MODE].

w Set the break-in function ON (p. 85).

•When step t is performed with the break-in function

OFF, the memory keyer contents are monitored.

e Select

r Push [F-2

KKEEYY

] to enter the keyer send menu.

•If the keyer root menu appears, push [F-1

SSNNDD

]. The

keyer starting menu can be changed in the miscella-

neous (others) set mode (p. 134).

t Push [F-1

MM11

] — [F-4

MM44

] momentarily to transmit

the contents one time; push and hold these keys

for 1 sec. to transmit the contents repeatedly.

•“

MM11

”– “

MM44

” are highlighted while transmitting.

•“

((

” and “

))

” appear while transmitting repeatedly.

•While transmitting repeatedly, push any function key to

cancel the transmission.

•Set the repeat interval of the memory keyer to 1–60

sec. (1 sec. steps). See p. 49 for keyer set mode.

•To decrement the contact number, push

[

(

GRP

)].

y Push [

(

GRP

)] twice to exit the memory

keyer send menu and return to normal CW mode

indication.

• Memory keyer send menu

Memory keyer

content

Contact number

[MODE]

[MENU/GRP]

[F-1]

[F-2] [F-3] [F-4]

D Memory keyer send menu

Menu group selection

Push [MENU/GRP] for 1 sec.

Selection from:

(Graphic)

Menu selection (Example: S)

Push [MENU/GRP] momentarily.

Selection from:

Either

Y or Z

Either

Y or Z

RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT

Editing a keyer memory

The contents of the memory keyer memories can be

set using the memory keyer edit menu. The memory

keyer can memorize and re-transmit 4 CW se-

quences for often-used CW messages, contest num-

ber, etc. Total capacity of the memory keyer is 55

characters per memory channel.

• Pre-programmed contents

•Programming contents

q Push [MODE] to select CW mode.

w Select

e Push [F-2

KKEEYY

] then [

(

GRP

)] to select the

keyer root menu.

•If the keyer root menu appears, skip pushing

[

(

GRP

)]. The keyer starting menu can be

changed in the miscellaneous (others) set mode. (p.

134)

r Push [F-2

EEDDTT

] to enter the keyer edit menu.

t Push [F-1

MM11

] — [F-4

MM44

] to select the desired

keyer memory channel.

y Push [

(

GRP

)] several times to select the de-

sired character group ([ABC], [123] or [etc]).

NOTE:

“

^” is used to transmit a following word with no

space such as

. Put “^” before a text string

such as ^AR, and the CW prosign “ ” is sent

with no space.

“✱” is used to insert the CW contest number.

The contest number automatically increments

by 1. This function is only available for one

memory keyer channel at a time. Memory

keyer channel M2 uses “✱” by default.

u Select the desired character by rotating [DIAL] or

by pushing the band key (HM-151) for the incre-

menting trigger memory number input.

•Push [F-1

ÅÅ

] or [F-2

ÇÇ

] for cursor movement.

•Push [F-3

DDEELL

] to delete the selected character.

•Push [F-4

SSPPCC

] to input a space.

•“✱” is for contact numbers and can only be used on the

memory channel used to increment the contact num-

ber (“ ” appears next to that channel).

i Repeat steps y and u until the desired contents

are input.

o Push [

(

GRP

)] to return to memory channel

selection mode, then select the next memory chan-

nel and repeat steps y and i for character input,

if desired.

!0 Push [

(

GRP

)] twice to exit the keyer edit

mode.

Key selection

ABC

Editable characters

A to Z (capital leters)

123

0 to 9 (numbers)

etc

/ ?

. , @ ✽

•Push and hold [MENU/GRP] for 1 sec. once or twice

to select the menu group

•Push [MENU/GRP] momentarily one or more times to

select the menu

CH Contents

CQ TEST CQ TEST DE ICOM ICOM TEST

UR 5NN✽ BK

CFM TU

QRZ?

DEL

SPACE M1..M4

KEYER EDIT

CQTESTCQTESTDEICOMICOM

TEST

QRZ?

CFMTU

UR5NN001BK

ABC

123

Memory channel select

Selected

character

[MENU/GRP]

[F-1]

[F-2] [F-3] [F-4]

RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT

CCoouunntt UUPP TTrriiggggeerr

This selects which of the four memory channels will

send the contest serial number. The count up trigger

increments the serial number automatically after each

complete serial number is sent.

•M1, M2, M3 and M4 can be set. (default: M2)

NNuummbbeerr SSttyyllee

This item sets the numbering system used for contest

(serial) numbers— normal or cut numbers.

Normal : Does not use morse cut number

(default)

190➜ANO: Sets 1 as A, 9 as N and 0 as O.

190➜ANT : Sets 1 as A, 9 as N and 0 as T.

90➜ NO : Sets 9 as N and 0 as O.

90➜ NT : Sets 9 as N and 0 as T.

PPrreesseenntt NNuummbbeerr

This item shows the current number in the count up

trigger channel set above.

•Rotate [DIAL] to change the number, or push [F-4

CCLLRR

] for 1sec. to reset the current number to 001.

This menu is used to set the contest (serial) number

and incrementing trigger channel, etc.

•Setting the contact (serial) number

Contact number can be automatically transmitted

from one of the memory keyer channels. The Morse

cut numbers can be used as the contact numbers.

The maximum number for contact numbers is 9999.

q Select CW mode with [MODE].

w Select

e Push [F-2

KKEEYY

] then [

(

GRP

)] to select the

keyer root menu.

•If the keyer root menu appears, skip pushing

[

(

GRP

)]. The keyer starting menu can be

changed in the miscellaneous (others) set mode. (see

p.134)

r Push [F-3

000011

] to enter the contest number set

menu.

t Push [F-1

≤≤

] or [F-2

≥≥

] to select the desired set

item.

•Push and hold [F-4

DDEEFF

] for 1 sec. to select the de-

fault condition or value.

y Push [

(

GRP

)] twice to exit the contest num-

ber set menu and return to normal CW mode indi-

cation.

•Push and hold [MENU/GRP] for 1 sec. once or twice

to select the menu group

•Push [MENU/GRP] momentarily one or more times to

select the menu

[MODE]

[MENU/GRP]

[F-1]

[F-2] [F-3] [F-4]

D Contest number set mode

RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT

This set mode is used to set the memory keyer repeat

time, dash weight, paddle speciﬁcations, keyer type,

etc.

•Setting the electronic keyer

q Select CW mode with [MODE].

w Select

e Push [F-2

KKEEYY

] then [

(

GRP

)] to select the

keyer root menu.

•If the keyer root menu appears, skip pushing

[

(

GRP

)]. The keyer starting menu can be

changed in the miscellaneous (others) set mode. (see

p.134)

r Push [F-4

SSEETT

] to enter the keyer set menu.

t Push [F-1

≤≤

] or [F-2

≥≥

] to select the desired set

item.

•Push and hold [F-4

DDEEFF

] for 1 sec. to select the de-

fault condition or value.

y Push [

(

GRP

)] twice to exit the keyer set

menu and return to normal CW mode indication.

•Push and hold [MENU/GRP] for 1 sec. once or twice

to select the menu group

•Push [MENU/GRP] momentarily one or more times to

select the menu

[MODE]

[MENU/GRP]

[F-1]

[F-2] [F-3] [F-4]

D Keyer set mode

KKeeyyeerr RReeppeeaatt TTiimmee

When sending CW using the repeat timer, this item

sets the time between transmission.

•1 to 60 sec. in 1 sec. steps can be selected.

•Push and hold [F-4

DDEEFF

] for 1 sec. to select a de-

fault setting. (default: 2 sec.)

DDoott//DDaasshh RRaattiioo

This item sets the dot/dash ratio.

•1:1:2.8 to 1:1:4.5 can be set.

•Check the ratio with side tone in CW mode.

•Push and hold [F-4

DDEEFF

] for 1 sec. to select a de-

fault ratio of 1:1:3.0.

Keying weight example: Morse code “K”

DASH

Weight setting:

1:1:3 (default)

Weight setting:

Adjusted

DASH

DOT (Fixed*)

Adjustable range SPACE (Fixed*)

*SPACE and DOT length can be adjusted with

“Key Speed” only in the quick set mode.

RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT

Keyer set mode (continued)

RRiissee TTiimmee

This item sets the envelop rise time during which the

output power reaches the set transmit power.

•2, 4, 6, or 8 msec. can be selected.

•Push and hold [F-4

DDEEFF

] for 1 sec. to select a de-

fault setting. (default: 4 sec.)

Key action

Tx output power

• About rise time

Rise time

Set Tx power level

Time

PPaaddddllee PPoollaarriittyy

This item sets the paddle polarity.

•Normal and reverse polarity can be selected.

•Push and hold [F-4

DDEEFF

] for 1 sec. to select a de-

fault setting. (default: Normal)

KKeeyyeerr TTyyppee

This item selects the keyer type for [KEY] connector

on the rear panel.

•ELEC-KEY, BUG-KEY and Straight key can be se-

lected.

•Push and hold [F-4

DDEEFF

] for 1 sec. to select a de-

fault setting. (default: ELEC-KEY)

MMIICC UU//DD KKeeyyeerr ((HHMM--110033))

(Microphone’s [UP]/[DN] switches keyer)

This item allows you to set the microphone [UP]/[DN]

switches to be used as a paddle.

•ON : [UP]/[DN] switches can be used for CW.

•OFF: [UP]/[DN] switches cannot be used for CW.

•Push and hold [F-4

DDEEFF

] for 1 sec. to select a de-

fault setting. (default: OFF)

NOTE: When “ON” is selected, the frequency and

memory channel cannot be changed using the

[UP]/[DN] switches.

Connect a CW paddle as at right to operate an elec-

tronic keyer from the front panel [MIC] connector.

•This function is available from the front panel mic

connector only.

•Be sure to select “

PPaaddddllee PPoollaarriittyy

,” “

KKeeyyeerr

TTyyppee

” “

MMIICC UU//DD KKeeyyeerr ((HHMM--110033))

” in the

keyer set mode. (see above)

•Connect straight key to “DOT” side.

•Push both of “DOT” and “DASH to activate the

squeeze operation.

NOTE: The HM-103 can be operate as a CW pad-

dle from both of the front panel and rear panel mic

connector. But the HM-103 is not available the

squeeze operation.

MIC connector

MIC U/D

paddle

DOT

DASH

3.9 kΩ ±5%

2.2 kΩ ±5%

D Paddle operation from [MIC] connector

■ Operating RTTY (FSK)

When using your RTTY terminal or TNC, consult the

manual that comes with the RTTY terminal or TNC.

q Push [

(

BAND

)]/[

(

BAND

)] to select the desired

band or push a band key on the HM-151.

w Push [MODE] momentarily to select RTTY mode.

•After RTTY mode is selected, push and hold [MODE]

for 1 sec. to toggle between RTTY and RTTY-R modes.

e Display the RTTY decoder screen.

•Push [F-2

DDEECC

] to display the Baudot decoder screen.

r Rotate [DIAL] to tune in a desired signal.

•Use [F-2

11//44

] in the

display when critical setting

is required.

•S-meter indicates received signal strength when signal

is received.

•If the received signal cannot be demodulated, try se-

lecting RTTY-R mode (or RTTY mode).

t Transmit a SEND signal from your TNC.

•[TX] indicator lights red.

•The Po meter indicates transmitted RTTY signal

strength.

y Operate the connected PC or TNC (TU) to trans-

mit RTTY (FSK) signals.

“RTTY” or “RTTY-R” appears

[Y]

[Z]

[DIAL]

[MODE][AF] [TX] indicator

[MENU/GRP] [F-2]

•Push and hold [MENU/GRP] for 1 sec. once or twice

to select the menu group

•Push [MENU/GRP] momentarily one or more times to

select the menu

RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT

•Preamp and attenuator (p. 72)

➥ Push [P.AMP/ATT] momentarily to turn the pre-

amp ON or OFF.

•“ ”appears when the preamp is set to ON.

➥ Push [P.AMP/ATT] for 1 sec. to turn the attenua-

tor ON.

•Push [P.AMP/ATT] momentarily to turn the attenuator

OFF.

•“ ”appears when the attenuator is set to ON.

•Twin PBT (passband tuning) (p. 77)

➥ Push [PBT/M-ch/RIT] (switch) momentarily once

or twice to select the twin PBT ON or OFF (M-ch

RIT).

•PBT indicator lights green when the twin PBT is se-

lected.

➥ Rotate [PBT/M-ch/RIT] (controls–inner/outer).

•Push [PBT/M-ch/RIT(

CLR

)] to clear the settings.

•AGC (auto gain control) (p. 74)

➥ While “

” is selected, push [F-3

AAGGCC

] momen-

tarily one or more times to select AGC fast, AGC

middle and AGC slow.

•“ ,” “ ” and “ ” appears when the

fast time constant, middle time constant and slow

time constant is selected, respectively.

➥ While “

” is selected, push and hold [F-3

AAGGCC

]

for 1 sec. to enter the AGC set mode.

•Push [F-2

FFAASSTT

], [F-3

MMIIDD

] or [F-4

SSLLOOWW

] to select

the time constant, then rotate [DIAL] to adjust the time

constant.

•Noise blanker (p. 78)

➥ Push [NB/ADJ] to turn the noise blanker ON and

OFF.

•“ ” appears when the noise blanker is set to ON.

➥ Push and hold [NB/ADJ] for 1 sec. to enter the

noise blanker set mode, then rotate [DIAL] to ad-

just the threshold level, or noise pulse width.

•DSP noise reduction (p. 79)

➥ Push [NR/LEV] to turn the DSP noise reduction

ON and OFF.

•“ ” appears when the DSP noise reduction is set to

ON.

➥ Push and hold [NR/LEV] for 1 sec. to enter the

noise reduction level set mode, then rotate [DIAL]

to adjust the DSP noise reduction level.

•Manual notch ﬁlter (pgs. 80, 82)

➥ Push [MNF/ADJ] to turn the manual notch filter

ON and OFF.

•“ ” appears when the manual notch ﬁlter is set to

ON.

➥ Push and hold [MNF/ADJ] for 1 sec. to enter the

manual notch ﬁlter set mode.

•Push [F-2

NNFF11

], [F-3

NNFF22

] to select the notch ﬁlter,

push [F-4

NNWW

] to set the ﬁlter width, rotate [DIAL] to

set the attenuated frequency.

•

⁄

4 function (p. 32)

➥ While “

” is selected, push [F-2

11//44

] to turn

the

⁄

4 function ON and OFF.

•“ ” indicator appears when the function is activated.

•Push and hold [MENU/GRP] for 1 sec. once or twice

to select the menu group

•Push [MENU/GRP] momentarily one or more times

to select the menu

D Convenient functions for receive

RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT

D RTTY reverse mode

Received characters are occasionally garbled when

the receive signal is reversed between MARK and

SPACE. This reversal can be caused by incorrect

TNC connections, settings, commands, etc.

To receive a reversed RTTY signal correctly, select

RTTY-R (RTTY reverse) mode.

q Push [MODE] momentarily several times to select

RTTY mode.

Push and hold [MODE] for 1 sec. to select RTTY or

RTTY-R mode.

ReverseNormal

BFO

170

2125

170

2125

BFO

Mark

Space

displayed freq.displayed freq.

Mark

Space

[MODE]

Twin peak ﬁlter

The twin peak ﬁlter changes the receive frequency re-

sponse by boosting 2 particular frequencies (2125 and

2295 Hz)

for better copying of desired RTTY signals.

q Push [MODE] momentarily to select RTTY mode.

•After RTTY mode is selected, push [MODE] for 1 sec.

to toggle between RTTY and RTTY-R modes.

w Push [AF(

SET

)] momentarily to enter the set mode

menu.

e Push [F-1

QQSS

] to enter the quick set mode.

r Push [F-1

≤≤

] or [F-2

≥≥

] to select “

TTwwiinn PPeeaakk

FFiilltteerr

.”

t Rotate [DIAL] to select the twin peak ﬁlter function

ON or OFF.

•The received audio volume may become greater when

the twin peak ﬁlter is turned ON.

y Push [

(

GRP

)] twice to return the normal op-

erating mode.

[DIAL][MENU/GRP] [F-1] [F-2]

[AF]

RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT

Function for the RTTY decoder indication

The transceiver has an RTTY decoder for Baudot

(mark freq.: 2125 Hz, shift freq.: 170 Hz, 45 bps).

An external terminal unit (TU) or terminal node con-

troller (TNC) is not necessary for receiving a Baudot

signal.

q Push [MODE] momentarily to select RTTY mode.

•After RTTY mode is selected, push [MODE] for 1 sec.

to toggle between RTTY and RTTY-R modes.

w Select

e Push [F-2

DDEECC

] momentarily to turn the RTTY de-

coder ON.

•When tuned into an RTTY signal, decoded characters

are displayed in the RTTY decoder screen.

r Push [F-1

HHLLDD

] momentarily to freeze the current

screen.

•“H” appears while the function is in use.

t Push [

(

GRP

)] to toggle the normal or wide

screen space.

y Push and hold [F-1

HHLLDD

] for 1 sec. to clear the dis-

played characters.

u Push [

(

GRP

)] to exit the RTTY decoder

screen.

The transceiver has an RTTY tuning iindicator to

make correct tuning easier.

The RTTY tuning meter is automatically displayed

when the RTTY decoder is turned ON.

•Push and hold [MENU/GRP] for 1 sec. once or twice

to select the menu group

•Push [MENU/GRP] momentarily one or more times to

select the menu

RTTY tuning meter

[MENU/GRP] [F-1] [F-2]

Setting the decoder threshold level

Adjust the RTTY decoder threshold level if some

characters are displayed when no signal is received.

q Call up the RTTY decoder screen as described

above.

w Push [F-3

AADDJJ

] to select the threshold level set-

ting condition.

e Rotate [DIAL] to adjust the RTTY decoder thresh-

old level.

•Push and hold [F-4

DDEEFF

] for 1 sec. to select the de-

fault condition.

r Push [

(

GRP

)] to exit the RTTY decoder

screen.

The UnShift On Space (USOS) function and new

line code can be set in the RTTY decode set mode.

(p. 55)

[DIAL][MENU/GRP] [F-3] [F-4]

RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT

RTTY decode set mode

This set mode is used to set the decode USOS func-

tion, etc.

q Push [MODE] momentarily to select RTTY mode.

•After RTTY mode is selected, push [MODE] for 1 sec.

to toggle between RTTY and RTTY-R modes.

w Select

e Push [F-2

DDEECC

] momentarily to turn the RTTY de-

coder ON.

•RTTY decoder screen appears.

r Push [F-4

SSEETT

] to select the RTTY decode set

mode.

t Push [F-1

≤≤

] or [F-2

≥≥

] to select the desired set

item.

y Set the desired condition using [DIAL].

•Push [F-4

DDEEFF

] for 1 sec. to select a default condition

or value.

u Push [

(

GRP

)] to exit from set mode.

•Push and hold [MENU/GRP] for 1 sec. once or twice

to select the menu group

•Push [MENU/GRP] momentarily one or more times to

select the menu

[MENU/GRP] [F-1] [F-2] [F-4] [DIAL]

RRTTTTYY DDeeccooddee UUSSOOSS

This item selects the USOS (UnShift On Space) func-

tion of the internal RTTY decoder.

OONN

Decode space as letter code

(default)

OOFFFF

Decode space as character

code

RRTTTTYY DDeeccooddee NNeeww LLiinnee CCooddee

This item selects the new line code of the internal

RTTY decoder.

CR : Carriage Return

LF : Line Feed

CCRR,,LLFF,,CCRR++LLFF

CR, LF and CR+LF

(default)

CCRR++LLFF

CR+LF only

RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT

D Pre-setting for using RTTY terminal or TNC

When using your RTTY terminal or TNC, consult the

manual that comes with the RTTY terminal or TNC.

Mark frequency

q Push [MODE] momentarily to select RTTY mode.

•After RTTY mode is selected, push [MODE] for 1 sec.

to toggle between RTTY and RTTY-R modes.

w Push [AF(

SET

)] momentarily to enter the set mode

menu.

e Push [F-1

QQSS

] to enter the quick set mode.

r Push [F-1 Y] or [F-2 Z] to select “

RRTTTTYY MMaarrkk

FFrreeqquueennccyy

.”

t Rotate [DIAL] to select the desired frequency.

•Push and hold [F-4

DDEEFF

] for 1 sec. to select the de-

fault frequency.

Shift width

q Enter the quick set mode as above.

w Push [F-1 Y] or [F-2 Z] to select “

RRTTTTYY SShhiifftt

WWiiddtthh

.”

e Rotate [DIAL] to select the desired shift width.

•Push and hold [F-4

DDEEFF

] for 1 sec. to select the de-

fault shift width.

RTTY keying polarity

q Enter the quick set mode as above.

w Push [F-1 Y] or [F-2 Z] to select “

RRTTTTYY kkeeyy--

iinngg PPoollaarriittyy

.”

e Rotate [DIAL] to select the desired keying polarity.

•Push and hold [F-4

DDEEFF

] for 1 sec. to select the de-

fault polarity.

After Pre-setting is finished, push [

(

GRP

)]

twice to return the normal operating mode.

RTTY keying is set to

‘normal’. (default)

normal :

key open=mark

key close=space

reverse:

key open=space

key close=mark

RTTY shift width is

set to 170 Hz.

(default)

170/200/425 Hz are

available.

RTTY mark frequency

is set to 2125 Hz.

(default)

2125, 1615 and 1275

Hz are available.

[MODE][AF]

[MENU/GRP] [F-1] [F-2] [F-4] [DIAL]

RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT

■ Operating AM

q Push [

(

BAND

)]/[

(

BAND

)] to select the desired

band or push a band key on the HM-151.

w Push [MODE] momentarily or push and hold for 1

sec. to select AM mode.

•After FM, WFM or AM mode is selected, push [MODE]

for 1 sec. to select from FM, WFM and AM modes.

e Rotate [DIAL] to tune in a desired signal.

•The S-meter indicates received signal strength when a

signal is received.

•The default tuning step for AM mode is 1 kHz; this can

be changed using the tuning step program mode. (p. 30)

r Rotate [AF] to set audio to a comfortable listening

level.

t Push [PTT] (microphone) to transmit.

•[TX] indicator lights red.

y Speak into the microphone at your normal voice

level.

•Adjust ‘MIC Gain’ at this step, if necessary. (p. 38)

u Release [PTT] (microphone) to return to receive.

“AM” appears

[Y]

[Z]

[DIAL]

[MODE][AF] [TX] indicator

D Convenient functions for receive

•Preamp and attenuator (p. 72)

➥ Push [P.AMP/ATT] momentarily to turn the pre-

amp ON or OFF.

•“ ”appears when the preamp is set to ON.

➥ Push [P.AMP/ATT] for 1 sec. to turn the attenua-

tor ON.

•Push [P.AMP/ATT] momentarily to turn the attenuator

OFF.

•“ ”appears when the attenuator is set to ON.

•Twin PBT (passband tuning) (p. 77)

➥ Push [PBT/M-ch/RIT] (switch) momentarily once

or twice to select the twin PBT ON or OFF (M-ch

RIT).

•PBT indicator lights green when the twin PBT is se-

lected.

➥ Rotate [PBT/M-ch/RIT] (controls–inner/outer).

•Push [PBT/M-ch/RIT(

CLR

)] to clear the settings.

•Noise blanker (p. 78)

➥ Push [NB/ADJ] to turn the noise blanker ON and

OFF.

•“ ”appears when the noise blanker is set to ON.

➥ Push and hold [NB/ADJ] for 1 sec. to enter the

noise blanker set mode, then rotate [DIAL] to ad-

just the threshold level, or noise pulse width.

•AGC (auto gain control) (p. 74)

➥ While “

” is selected, push [F-3

AAGGCC

] momen-

tarily one or more times to select AGC fast, AGC

middle and AGC slow.

•“ ,” “ ” and “ ” appears when the

fast time constant, middle time constant and slow

time constant is selected, respectively.

➥ While “

” is selected, push and hold [F-3

AAGGCC

]

for 1 sec. to enter the AGC set mode.

•Push [F-2

FFAASSTT

], [F-3

MMIIDD

] or [F-4

SSLLOOWW

] to select

the time constant, then rotate [DIAL] to adjust the time

constant.

•Push and hold [MENU/GRP] for 1 sec. once or twice

to select the menu group

•Push [MENU/GRP] momentarily one or more times

to select the menu

RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT

Convenient functions for receive (continued)

•DSP noise reduction (p. 79)

➥ Push [NR/LEV] to turn the DSP noise reduction

ON and OFF.

•“ ”appears when the DSP noise reduction is set to

ON.

➥ Push [NR/LEV] for 1 sec. to enter the noise re-

duction level set mode, then rotate [DIAL] to ad-

just the DSP noise reduction level.

•Manual notch ﬁlter (pgs. 80, 81)

➥ Push [MNF/ADJ] to turn the manual notch filter

ON and OFF.

•“ ” appears when the manual notch ﬁlter is set to

ON.

➥ Push and hold [MNF/ADJ] for 1 sec. to enter the

manual notch ﬁlter set mode.

•Push [F-2

NNFF11

], [F-3

NNFF22

] to select the notch ﬁlter,

push [F-4

NNWW

] to set the ﬁlter width, rotate [DIAL] to

set the notch frequency.

•Auto notch ﬁlter (p. 80)

➥ Push [ANF/

•

REC] to turn the auto notch ﬁlter ON

and OFF.

•“ ” appears when the auto notch ﬁlter is set to ON.

•VSC (voice squelch control) (p. 82)

➥ While “

” is selected, push [F-4

VVSSCC

] to turn

the VSC function ON and OFF.

•“”appears when VSC function is set to ON.

D Convenient functions for transmit

•Transmit quality monitor (p. 87)

➥ Push [AF(

SET

)], then [F-4

OOTTHH

] to enter the mis-

cellaneous (others) set mode. Select an item with

[F-1

≤≤

]/[F-2

≥≥

], then rotate [DIAL] to turn the

monitor function ON and OFF.

•VOX (voice operated transmit) (p. 83)

➥ While “

” is selected, push [F-1

VVOOXX

] to turn

the VOX function ON and OFF.

•“ ” appears when the VOX function is set to ON.

➥ While “

” is selected, push and hold [F-1

VVOOXX

]

for 1 sec. to enter the VOX set mode.

•Push [F-1

≤≤

]/[F-2

≥≥

] to select an item.

•Rotate [DIAL] to set the value/conditions.

•Push and hold [MENU/GRP] for 1 sec. once or twice

to select the menu group

•Push [MENU/GRP] momentarily one or more times

to select the menu

RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT

■ Operating FM

q Push [

(

BAND

)]/[

(

BAND

)] to select the desired

band or push a band key on the HM-151.

w Push [MODE] momentarily or push and hold for 1

sec. to select FM mode.

•After FM, WFM or AM mode is selected, push [MODE]

for 1 sec. to select from FM, WFM and AM modes.

e Rotate [DIAL] to tune in a desired signal.

•The S-meter indicates received signal strength when a

signal is received.

•The default tuning step for FM mode is 1 kHz; this can

be changed using the tuning step program mode. (p. 30)

r Rotate [AF] to set audio to a comfortable listening

level.

t Push [PTT] (microphone) to transmit.

•[TX] indicator lights red.

y Speak into the microphone at your normal voice

level.

•Adjust ‘MIC Gain’ at this step, if necessary. (p. 38)

u Release [PTT] (microphone) to return to receive.

“FM” appears

[Y]

[Z]

[DIAL]

[MODE][AF] [TX] indicator

D Convenient functions for receive

•Preamp and attenuator (p. 72)

➥ Push [P.AMP/ATT] momentarily to turn the pre-

amp ON or OFF.

•“ ”appears when the preamp is set to ON.

➥ Push and hold [P.AMP/ATT] for 1 sec. to turn the

attenuator ON.

•Push [P.AMP/ATT] momentarily to turn the attenuator

OFF.

•“ ”appears when the attenuator is set to ON.

•Auto notch ﬁlter (p. 80)

➥ Push [ANF/

•

REC] to turn the auto notch ﬁlter ON

and OFF.

•“ ” appears when the auto notch ﬁlter is set to ON.

•DSP noise reduction (p. 79)

➥ Push [NR/LEV] to turn the DSP noise reduction

ON and OFF.

•“ ”appears when the DSP noise reduction is set to

ON.

➥ Push and hold [NR/LEV] for 1 sec. to enter the

noise reduction level set mode, then rotate [DIAL]

to adjust the DSP noise reduction level.

•VSC (voice squelch control) (p. 82)

➥ While “

” is selected, push [F-4

VVSSCC

] to turn

the VSC function ON and OFF.

•“ ” appears when VSC function is set to ON.

D Convenient functions for transmit

•VOX (voice operated transmit) (p. 83)

➥ While “

” is selected, push [F-1

VVOOXX

] to turn

the VOX function ON and OFF.

•“VOX” appears when the VOX function is set to ON.

➥ While “

” is selected, push [F-1

VVOOXX

] for 1

sec. to enter the VOX set mode.

•Push [F-1

≤≤

]/[F-2

≥≥

] to select an item.

•Rotate [DIAL] to set the value/conditions.

•Transmit quality monitor (p. 87)

➥ Push [AF(

SET

)], then [F-4

OOTTHH

] to enter the mis-

cellaneous (others) set mode. Select an item with

[F-1

≤≤

]/[F-2

≥≥

], then rotate [DIAL] to turn the

monitor function ON and OFF.

•Push and hold [MENU/GRP] for 1 sec. once or twice

to select the menu group

•Push [MENU/GRP] momentarily one or more times

to select the menu

RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT

D Tone squelch operation

Tone squelch operation is a method of communica-

tions using selective calling. Only received signals

having a matching tone will open the squelch. Before

communicating using tone squelch, all members of

your party must agree on the tone squelch frequency.

q Push [MODE] one or more times to select FM

mode.

w Select

e Push [F-3

TTOONN

] momentarily several times to turn

the tone squelch function ON.

•“”appears.

r Push and hold [F-3

TTOONN

] for 1 sec. to enter the FM

tone set mode.

•The selected tone frequency for TSQL appears.

•Other tone functions can be set by pushing [F-1

TTOONN

t Rotate [DIAL] to set the desired subaudible tone

frequency.

•See table at right for available tone frequencies.

•Push and hold [F-3

DDEEFF

] for 1 sec. to select the de-

fault frequency.

•Push [

(

GRP

)] to exit the FM tone set mode.

y Communicate in the usual manner.

•Push and hold [PTT] to transmit; release [PTT] to re-

ceive.

•Available tone squelch frequencies (Unit: Hz)

[DIAL][MENU/GRP] [F-3][F-1]

•Push and hold [MENU/GRP] for 1 sec. once or twice

to select the menu group

•Push [MENU/GRP] momentarily one or more times to

select the menu

67.0

69.3

71.9

74.4

77.0

79.7

82.5

085.4

088.5

091.5

094.8

097.4

100.0

103.5

107.2

110.9

114.8

118.8

123.0

127.3

131.8

136.5

141.3

146.2

151.4

156.7

159.8

162.2

165.5

167.9

171.3

173.8

177.3

179.9

183.5

186.2

189.9

192.8

196.6

199.5

203.5

206.5

210.7

218.1

225.7

229.1

233.6

241.8

250.3

254.1

RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT

D DTCS operation

DTCS function is an another method of communica-

tions using selective calling. Only received signals

having a matching 3-digit code will open the squelch.

q Push [MODE] one or more times to select FM

mode.

w Select

e Push [F-3

TTOONN

] once or twice to turn the DTCS

function ON.

•“”appears.

r Push and hold [F-3

TTOONN

] for 1 sec. to enter the FM

tone set mode.

•The selected DTCS code appears.

•Other tone functions can be set by pushing [F-1

TTOONN

t Rotate [DIAL] to set the desired DTCS code and

push [F-4

PPOOLL

] several times to select the desired

code polarity.

NNNN

: Normal polarity is used for both transmit and

receive.

NNRR

: Normal polarity is used for transmit, re-

versed polarity is used for receive.

RRNN

: Reversed polarity is used for transmit, nor-

mal polarity is used for receive.

RRRR

: Reversed polarity is used for both transmit

and receive.

•Push and hold [F-3

DDEEFF

] for 1 sec. to select the de-

fault code and polarity.

•Push [

(

GRP

)] to exit the FM tone set mode.

y Communicate in the usual manner.

•Push and hold [PTT] to transmit; release [PTT] to re-

ceive.

•Available tone codes

[DIAL][MENU/GRP] [F-3] [F-4]

•Push and hold [MENU/GRP] for 1 sec. once or twice

to select the menu group

•Push [MENU/GRP] momentarily one or more times to

select the menu

023

025

026

031

032

036

043

047

051

053

054

065

071

072

073

074

114

115

116

122

125

131

132

134

143

145

152

155

156

162

165

172

174

205

212

223

225

226

243

244

245

246

251

252

255

261

263

265

266

271

274

306

311

315

325

331

332

343

346

351

356

364

365

371

411

412

413

423

431

432

445

446

452

454

455

462

464

465

466

503

506

516

523

526

532

546

565

606

612

624

627

631

632

654

662

664

703

712

723

731

732

734

743

754

RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT

By monitoring a signal that is being transmitted on a

repeater input frequency, you can determine the tone

frequency necessary to access a repeater.

qDuring tone squelch, DTCS squelch or repeater

operation (“ ,” “ ” or “ ” is dis-

played), select

w Push and hold [F-3

TTOONN

] for 1 sec. to enter the FM

tone set mode.

e Push [F-2

SSCCNN

] to toggle the tone scan operation

ON and OFF.

•When a matched tone or code is detected, tone scan

automatically stops, the matched tone or code is dis-

played and the tone or code setting is automatically ad-

justed accordingly.

r Push [

(

GRP

)] to exit the FM tone set mode.

[MENU/GRP] [F-2] [F-3]

•Push and hold [MENU/GRP] for 1 sec. once or twice

to select the menu group

•Push [MENU/GRP] momentarily one or more times to

select the menu

D Tone scan operation

During tone squelch operation. During DTCS squelch operation. During repeater operation.

RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT

■ Repeater operation

A repeater ampliﬁes received signals and retransmits

them at a different frequency. When using a repeater,

the transmit frequency is shifted from the receive fre-

quency by an offset frequency. A repeater can be ac-

cessed using split frequency operation with the shift

frequency set to the repeater’s offset frequency.

For accessing a repeater which requires a repeater

tone, set the repeater tone frequency in the FM tone

set mode as described on the next page.

• To set the transceiver for repeater operation, follow

the steps q to e to select VFO mode, desired band,

FM mode.

q Push [F-4

VV//MM

] to select VFO mode.

w Push [

(

BAND

)]/[

(

BAND

)] to select the desired

band or push a band key on the HM-151.

e Push [MODE] momentarily or push and hold for 1

sec. to select FM mode.

•After FM, WFM or AM mode is selected, push [MODE]

for 1 sec. to select from FM, WFM and AM modes.

r Rotate [DIAL] to set the receive frequency (repeater

output frequency).

t Select

y Push [F-2

DDUUPP

] once or twice to set the offset di-

rection.

•“ ” or “ ” appears.

•The default repeater offsets are the standard values of

0.1000 MHz for HF, 0.500 MHz for 50MHz, 0.600 MHz

for 144 MHz, and 5.000 MHz for 430 MHz. The offset

can be adjusted in set mode. (pgs. 129, 130)

•The transmit frequency can be monitored while pushing

and holding [F-4

XXFFCC

] in the

display.

u Push [F-3

TTOONN

] to turn the repeater tone ON.

•“”appears.

•The tone frequency can be set in the FM tone set mode

as described on the next page.

i Communicate in the usual manner.

•Push and hold [PTT] to transmit; release [PTT] to re-

ceive.

•Push and hold [MENU/GRP] for 1 sec. once or twice to

select the menu group

•Push [MENU/GRP] momentarily one or more times to

select the menu

15k

SFT

FIL2

VFO

USB

FIL2

14.100.00

VFO

SPLIT

TONE

ANT

METER

ATT

OFF

P.AMP

12:00

Shifted frequency

and mode appear.

“DUP–” or “DUP+”

appears.

“TONE” appears.

[DIAL][MENU/GRP] [F-2] [F-3]

This function allows you to set repeater operation by

pushing one key.

➥ To set the transceiver for repeater operation using

the one-touch repeater function, follow the steps q

to t as above, then push and hold [F-2

DDUUPP

] for

1 sec.

•Push and hold [F-2

DDUUPP

] for 1 sec. again to exit the re-

peater operating condition

Set the offset shift direction and frequency in ad-

vance (p. 130) as well as the tone frequency (see

p. 64).

[F-2]

D One-touch repeater function

RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT

Some repeaters require subaudible tones to be ac-

cessed. Subaudible tones are superimposed over

your normal signal and must be set in advance. The

transceiver has 50 tones from 67.0 Hz to 254.1 Hz.

Each memory channel can store a different subaudi-

ble tone frequency.

q Select

w Push [F-3

TTOONN

] once or twice to turn the tone en-

coder ON.

•“TONE” appears.

e Push and hold [F-3

TTOONN

] for 1 sec. to enter the FM

tone set mode.

•The selected tone frequency appears.

•Other tone functions can be set by pushing [F-1

TTOONN

r Rotate [DIAL] to set the desired subaudible tone

frequency.

•See table at right for available tone frequencies.

t Push [

(

GRP

)] to exit the FM tone set mode.

Store repeater tone frequencies and ON/OFF settings

in memory channels for easy recall. The transceiver’s

repeater tone frequency is set to 88.5 Hz by default.

This can be changed if desired.

•Available tone squelch frequencies

(Unit: Hz)

[DIAL][MENU/GRP] [F-3][F-1]

CONVENIENT

•Push and hold [MENU/GRP] for 1 sec. once or twice

to select the menu group

•Push [MENU/GRP] momentarily one or more times to

select the menu

D Repeater tone frequency

67.0

69.3

71.9

74.4

77.0

79.7

82.5

085.4

088.5

091.5

094.8

097.4

100.0

103.5

107.2

110.9

114.8

118.8

123.0

127.3

131.8

136.5

141.3

146.2

151.4

156.7

159.8

162.2

165.5

167.9

171.3

173.8

177.3

179.9

183.5

186.2

189.9

192.8

196.6

199.5

203.5

206.5

210.7

218.1

225.7

229.1

233.6

241.8

250.3

254.1

D Auto repeater function (USA version only)

RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT

You may be able to receive the other party’s transmit

signal directly (called ‘listening on the repeater input’)

without having to go through a repeater.

Transmit frequency monitor check (XFC) allows you

to check this.

q Select

w While receiving, push and hold [F-4

XXFFCC

] to see if

you can receive the other party’s transmit signal di-

rectly.

•While holding [F-4

XXFFCC

], the offset direction and fre-

quency are displayed above the multi-function key in-

dicator.

SPCH

/LOCK

TUNER

/CALL

XFC

V/M

F-1

F-2

FIL

MODE

GENE

123

456

789

F-INP

ENT

1.8 3.5 7

10 14 18

21 24 28

50 144 430

HM-151

XFC

•Push and hold [MENU/GRP] for 1 sec. once or twice

to select the menu group

•Push [MENU/GRP] momentarily one or more times to

select the menu

[MENU/GRP] [F-4]

D Transmit frequency monitor check

This function automatically activates the repeater set-

tings (DUP– or DUP+ and/or tone encoder ON/OFF)

when the operating frequency falls within the general

repeater output frequency range and deactivates

them when outside of the range.

Set the auto repeater function ON-1 (auto duplex set-

ting) or ON-2 (auto duplex setting and activating tone

encoder) in the miscellaneous (others) set mode in

advance (p. 130). When ON-1 or ON-2 are turned on,

repeater settings are automatically activated accord-

ing to the table below right.

ON-1 sets the duplex setting and ON-2 sets the du-

plex setting and tone encoder automatically.

q Push [AF(

SET

)] momentarily to enter the set mode

menu.

w Push [F-4

OOTTHH

] to enter the miscellaneous (oth-

ers) set mode.

e Push [F-1

≤≤

] or [F-2

≥≥

] to select “

AAuuttoo RRee--

ppeeaatteerr

.”

r Rotate [DIAL] to select the desired auto repeater

condition from ON-1, ON-2 and OFF.

•Push [F-4

DDEEFF

] for 1 sec. to return to default setting.

t Push [

(

GRP

)] twice to return to the normal

operating mode.

•Frequency range and offset direction (for USA)

[DIAL][MENU/GRP]

[AF]

[F-1] [F-2] [F-4]

FREQUENCY RANGE DUPLEX DIRECTION

51.620–51.999999 MHz

52.500–52.999999 MHz minus duplex

53.500–53.999999 MHz

145.200–145.499999 MHz

minus duplex

146.610–146.999999 MHz

147.000–147.399999 MHz plus duplex

442.000–444.999999 MHz plus duplex

447.000–449.999999 MHz minus duplex

RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT

D Storing a non standard repeater

q Turn the auto repeater function OFF in the miscel-

laneous (others) set mode. (p. 130)

w Push [MODE] to select FM mode.

e Select

r Push [F-4

VV//MM

] to select VFO mode.

t Select

, then push [F-2

AA//BB

] to select VFO A.

y Rotate [DIAL] to set the receive frequency (re-

peater output frequency).

u Push [F-2

AA//BB

] to select VFO B.

i Rotate [DIAL] to set the transmit frequency (re-

peater input frequency).

o Push [F-2

AA//BB

] to select VFO A.

!0 Push [F-1

SSPPLL

] to turn the split function ON.

•“ ”appears.

!1 Select

, then push [F-3

TTOONN

] to turn on the

previously set tone encoder ON. (p. 64)

!2 Rotate [M-ch] to select the desired memory chan-

nel.

•“ ” appears when the blank channel is selected.

!3 Select

, then push and hold [F-2

MMWW

] for 1 sec.

to store the contents in the selected memory chan-

nel.

Rotate

Push

push

TON

SPL

push

Set the frequency.

Selected M2, then

Selected M3, then

Set the frequency.

Appears

Select

•Push and hold [MENU/GRP] for 1 sec. once or twice

to select the menu group

•Push [MENU/GRP] momentarily one or more times to

select the menu

[DIAL][MENU/GRP]

[F-1]

[F-2] [F-3] [F-4]

RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT

A 1750 Hz tone is required to access most European

repeaters.

➥ While pushing and holding [PTT], push [F-3

TTOONN

]

in the

display during repeater operation.

(pgs. 63, 66)

NOTE: This function is not available for non-Euro-

pean versions.

Popup indication

appears.

[MENU/GRP] [F-3]

■ 1750 Hz tone burst

To transmit a DTMF code using a DTMF send menu,

program the desired code in advance as described on

next page.

•Transmitting

q Select FM mode with [MODE].

w Select

e Push [F-2

DDTTMM

] to enter the DTMF send menu.

•If the DTMF root menu appears, push [F-1

SSNNDD

]. The

DTMF starting menu can be changed in the miscella-

neous (others) set mode (see p. 134).

r Push [F-1

DD11

] — [F-4

DD44

] to transmit the DTMF

code.

•“

DD11

”– “

DD44

” are highlighted while transmitting.

•Set the DTMF speed from 100–500 msec. (100 msec.

steps). See next page for DTMF set mode.

t Push [

(

GRP

)] twice to exit DTMF send

menu and return to the normal FM mode display.

•Push and hold [MENU/GRP] for 1 sec. once or twice

to select the menu group

•Push [MENU/GRP] momentarily one or more times to

select the menu

• DTMF send menu

DTMF code

sequence

[MODE]

[MENU/GRP]

[F-1]

[F-2] [F-3] [F-4]

D DTMF send menu

■ DTMF memory encoder

DTMF tones are used for autopatching, controlling

other equipment, etc. The transceiver has 4 DTMF

memory channels (D1–D4) for storage of often-used

DTMF codes sequence of up to 24 digits.

RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT

Programming a DTMF code

q Push [MODE] to select FM mode.

w Select

e Push [F-2

DDTTMM

] then [

(

GRP

)] to select the

DTMF root menu.

•If the DTMF root menu appears, skip pushing

[

(

GRP

)]. The DTMF starting menu can be

changed in the miscellaneous (others) set mode. (see

p. 134)

r Push [F-2

EEDDTT

] to enter the DTMF edit menu.

t Push [F-1

DD11

] — [F-4

DD44

] to select the desired

DTMF memory channel.

y Select the desired code by rotating [DIAL].

•Push [F-1

ÅÅ

] or [F-2

ÇÇ

] for cursor movement.

•Push [F-3

DDEELL

] to delete the selected code.

u Repeat steps t and y until the desired contents

are input.

i Push [

(

GRP

)] to return to memory channel

selection mode, then select the next memory chan-

nel and repeat steps t and u for code input, if de-

sired.

o Push [

(

GRP

)] twice to exit the keyer edit

mode.

DTMF memory channel select

Selected

code

[MENU/GRP]

[F-1]

[F-2] [F-3] [F-4] [DIAL]

•Push and hold [MENU/GRP] for 1 sec. once or twice

to select the menu group

•Push [MENU/GRP] momentarily one or more times to

select the menu

The rate at which DTMF memories send individual

DTMF characters can be set to accommodate oper-

ating needs.

q Select the DTMF root menu as described above.

w Push [F-4

SSEETT

] to enter the DTMF set mode.

e Rotate [DIAL] to set the desired DTMF speed.

•Four rates are available: “100 ms” is the fastest; “500

ms” is slowest.

•Push and hold [F-4

DDEEFF

] for 1 sec. to select the de-

fault rate.

r Push [

(

GRP

)] twice to exit the DTMF set

mode and return to the normal FM mode display.

D DTMF speed

FUNCTIONS FOR RECEIVE

■ Simple band scope

This DSP-based simple band scope allows you to dis-

play conditions on the selected band, as well as rela-

tive strength of signals. The IC-7000 has two modes

for the spectrum indication—one is ﬁx mode, and an-

other one is center mode.

NOTE: The IC-7000’s simple band scope can

monitor the displayed frequency during sweeping.

Both the receving and sweeping functions use the

same receive circuits which must switch at high

speed. This switching sound may be irritating to lis-

ten to. If so, set the desired monitoring sound,

“

FFAASSTT SSwweeeepp SSoouunndd

,” or change the fast

sweep setting, “

FFAASSTT SSwweeeepp

,” in the scope set

mode (p. 72).

➥ Select

(Scope).

•Push and hold [MENU/GRP] for 1 sec. once or twice

to select the menu group

(Graphic).

•Push [MENU/GRP] momentarily one or more times to

select the menu

(Scope).

[MENU/GRP]

Quick entry

➥ Push and hold [

(

BAND

)] for 1 sec. to turn the

simple band scope ON and OFF.

•Push [

(

GRP

)] also to turn OFF.

[Y]

FUNCTIONS FOR RECEIVE

D Fix mode

Displays signals within the speciﬁed frequency range.

The selected band conditions can be observed at a

glance when using this mode.

q Set a mode and frequency.

w Select

(Scope).

e Push [F-3

FFIIXX

] momentarily to select the fix

mode.

•“O” and readout frequency indicator appear when the

ﬁx mode is selected.

r Push [F-4

SSPPDD

] momentarily to select the sweep

speed.

•“≈” or “≈≈” appears when Slow speed or Fast speed is

selected, respectively.

t Push [F-1

SSPPNN

] one or more times to select the

desired steps.

•±10, 25, 50, 100 and 250 kHz are available.

•Push and hold [F-1

SSPPNN

] for 1 sec. to select the ±10

kHz step.

•“

” or “

” indicates when the displayed frequency is out

of range. The scope center position can be set to the

displayed frequency by pushing and holding [F-3

FFIIXX

] for 1 sec.

•The simple band scope operates in the peak level hold

mode. Peak levels are displayed in the background of

the current spectrum in a different color until the receive

frequency changes. This can be cleared by pushing

and holding [F-2

HHLLDD

] for 1 sec., or deactivated in the

scope set mode. (p. 72)

y Push [F-2

HHLLDD

] to freeze the current spectrum dis-

play.

•“H” appears while the function is in use.

NOTE: If there is a lot of signal noise, turn the pre-

amp OFF and the attenuator ON (p. 72) to reduce

the input level and improve the readability of the

scope.

[MENU/GRP]

[F-1]

[F-2] [F-3] [F-4]

•Push and hold [MENU/GRP] for 1 sec. once or twice

to select the menu group

(Graphic).

•Push [MENU/GRP] momentarily one or more times to

select the menu

(Scope).

FUNCTIONS FOR RECEIVE

D Center mode

Displays signals around the displayed frequency

within the selected span. The set frequency is always

displayed at the center of the screen.

q Set a mode and frequency.

w Select

(Scope).

e Push [F-3

FFIIXX

] momentarily to select the center

mode.

•“= ” appears when the center mode is selected.

r Push [F-4

SSPPDD

] momentarily to select the sweep

speed.

•“≈” or “≈≈” appears when Slow speed or Fast speed is

selected, respectively.

t Push [F-1

SSPPNN

] one or more times to select the

desired steps.

•±10, 25, 50, 100 and 250 kHz are available.

•Push and hold [F-1

SSPPNN

] for 1 sec. to select the ±10

kHz step.

•The simple band scope operates in the peak level hold

mode. Peak levels are displayed in the background of

the current spectrum in a different color until the receive

frequency changes. This can be cleared by pushing

and holding [F-2

HHLLDD

] for 1 sec., or deactivated in the

scope set mode. (p. 72)

y Push [F-2

HHLLDD

] to freeze the current spectrum dis-

play and range.

•“H ” and readout frequency indicator appear while the

function is in use.

NOTE: If there is a lot of signal noise, turn the pre-

amp OFF and the attenuator ON (p. 72) to reduce

the input level and improve the readability of the

scope.

[MENU/GRP]

[F-1]

[F-2] [F-3] [F-4]

•Push and hold [MENU/GRP] for 1 sec. once or twice

to select the menu group

(Graphic).

•Push [MENU/GRP] momentarily one or more times to

select the menu

(Scope).

D Scope set mode

This set mode is used to set the peak hold function

and scope size setting.

q Select

(Scope).

w Push and hold [F-4

SSPPDD

] for 1 sec. to enter the

scope set mode.

e Push [F-1

≤≤

] or [F-2

≥≥

] to select the desired set

item.

r Set the desired condition using [DIAL].

•Push [F-4

DDEEFF

] for 1 sec. to select a default condition.

t Push [

(

GRP

)] to exit from set mode.

[MENU/GRP] [F-1] [F-2] [F-4] [DIAL]

•Push and hold [MENU/GRP] for 1 sec. once or twice

to select the menu group

(Graphic).

•Push [MENU/GRP] momentarily one or more times to

select the menu

(Scope).

FUNCTIONS FOR RECEIVE

■ Preamp and attenuator

The preamp ampliﬁes received signals in the receiver

input (front end) circuit to improve the S/N ratio and

sensitivity. Turn this function ON when receiving weak

signals.

The attenuator prevents a strong undesired signal

near the desired frequency or near your location,

such as from a broadcast station, from causing dis-

tortion or spurious signals.

Push [P.AMP/ATT] momentarily to turn the preamp

ON and OFF; push and hold for 1 sec. to turn the at-

tenuator ON.

•“ ” appears when the preamp is ON; “ ” ap-

pears when the 12 dB attenuator is ON.

•Only one of these functions can be activated at a time.

momentarily

momentarily 1 sec.

[P.AMP/ATT]

“ ” or “ ” appears.

Scope set mode (Continued)

MMaaxx HHoolldd

This item turns the peak level holding function ON

and OFF.

OONN

Peak hold is turned ON.

(default)

OOFFFF

Peak hold is turned OFF.

SSccooppee SSiizzee

This item toggles the scope size setting between nor-

mal and wide.

NNoorrmmaall

Normal size is selected.

(default)

WWiiddee

Wide size is selected.

FFAASSTT SSwweeeepp

This item selects the sweep speed setting.

CCoonnttiinnuuoouuss

Push [F-4

SSPPDD

] momentar-

ily to toggle the sweep

speed Fast and Slow contin-

uously. (default)

11 SSwweeeepp

One Fast speed sweep oc-

curs each time [F-4

SSPPDD

] is

pushed momentarily.

FFAASSTT SSwweeeepp SSoouunndd

This item sets the monitoring sound level for fast

sweeping.

--1100ddBB

Monitoring sound is set 10 dB smaller than

normal sound. (default)

00ddBB

: Same as normal sound.

OOFFFF

: No sound comes out while fast sweeping.

■ RIT function

The RIT (Receive Incremental Tuning) function com-

pensates for stations transmitting off-frequency.

The function shifts the receive frequency up to ±9.999

kHz in 1 Hz steps (10 Hz steps when cancelling the 1

Hz step readout) without moving the transmit fre-

quency.

q Push [PBT/M-ch/RIT] momentarily to select the M-

ch/RIT function, if the twin PBT is selected.

•[PBT/M-ch/RIT] indicator (Green) goes out.

w Push and hold [PBT/M-ch/RIT] for 1 sec. to enter

the RIT/∂TX mode.

e Push [F-1

RRIITT

] to turn the RIT function ON.

•“ ” indicator and the frequency shift appear when the

function is ON.

r Rotate [RIT] (outer) control to compensate for off-

frequency stations.

•The transmit frequency is not shifted.

t To reset the RIT frequency, push and hold [F-3

CCLLRR

] for 1 sec.

•Push [F-3

CCLLRR

] momentarily to reset the RIT fre-

quency when “

QQuuiicckk RRIITT//∂∂TTXX CClleeaarr

” in the

miscellaneous (others) set mode is ON. (p. 133)

y To cancel the RIT function, push [F-1

RRIITT

] mo-

mentarily again.

•“ ” indicator disappears.

u Push [

(

GRP

)] to exit the RIT/∂TX mode.

When RIT and ∂TX are ON at the same time, the

[RIT] (outer) control shifts both the transmit and re-

ceive frequencies from the displayed frequency at

the same time.

Push

Rotate

Push for 1sec.

Appear

Reset to

“0.00k”

[MENU/GRP] [F-1] [F-3]

[PBT/M-ch/RIT] indicator

[PBT/M-ch/RIT] switch

[RIT] (outer)

RIT

FUNCTIONS FOR RECEIVE

•Calculate function

The shift frequency of the RIT (or ∂TX) function can

be added/subtracted to the displayed frequency.

While displaying the RIT (and/or ∂TX) shift fre-

quency, push and hold [F-1

RRIITT

] (or [F-2

∂∂TTXX

]) for

1 sec.

•Practical example

When you ﬁnd a DX station on 21.025 MHz/CW and

the station is picking up stations transmitting slightly

up from 21.025 MHz.

q Push [F-1

RRIITT

] and [F-2

∂∂TTXX

] to turn both the

RIT and ∂TX functions ON.

w Rotate [RIT] (outer) to find the DX station’s re-

ceive frequency.

e When you ﬁnd the DX station’s receive frequency,

push [F-1

RRIITT

] to turn the RIT function OFF.

•Now you can transmit the DX station’s receive fre-

quency and receive on the DX station’s transmit fre-

quency (21.025 MHz).

r Start transmitting when the station stands by for

new callers.

2.4k

SFT

FIL2

USB

14.100.00

RIT

2.4k

SFT

FIL2

USB

14.100.00

RIT

VFO

ANT

METER

P.AMP

ANT

METER

P.AMP

12:00

Push and hold

D Setting the AGC time constant

FUNCTIONS FOR RECEIVE

■ AGC function

The AGC (auto gain control) controls receiver gain to

produce a constant audio output level even when the

received signal strength is varied by fading, etc.

The transceiver has 3 AGC characteristics (time con-

stant; fast, mid, slow) for non-FM/WFM mode.

The FM/WFM modes AGC time constant is ﬁxed as

‘FAST’ (0.1 sec.) and AGC time constant cannot be

selected.

q Select non-FM/WFM mode with [MODE].

w Select

e Push [F-3

AAGGCC

] several times to select AGC fast,

AGC medium (MID) AGC slow or AGC OFF.

•“ ,” “ ,” “ ” or “ ” appears when

AGC fast, AGC medium (MID), AGC slow or AGC OFF

is selected, respectively.

“” (OFF)

appears when AGC time constant

OFF is set for one of FAST, MID, SLOW setting in

AGC set mode.

[MENU/GRP] [F-3]

•Push and hold [MENU/GRP] for 1 sec. once or twice

to select the menu group

•Push [MENU/GRP] momentarily one or more times to

select the menu

D AGC time constant selection

q Select the desired mode other than FM/WFM

modes.

w Select

e Push and hold [F-3

AAGGCC

] for 1 sec. to enter the

AGC set mode.

r Push one of [F-2

FFAASSTT

], [F-3

MMIIDD

], [F-4

SSLLOOWW

]

to select the desired AGC time constant.

t Rotate [DIAL] to set the desired time constant.

•AGC time constants can be selected between 0.1 to

8.0 sec. (depends on mode) or turned OFF.

•Push and hold [F-2

FFAASSTT

], [F-3

MMIIDD

] or [F-4

SSLLOOWW

]

for 1 sec. to select a default value each for fast, mid.

and slow, respectively.

y Select another mode other than FM/WFM. Repeat

steps r and t, if desired.

•See table to the right for available time constants.

u Push [

(

GRP

)] to exit the AGC set mode.

•Selectable AGC time constant (unit: sec.)

[MENU/GRP] [DIAL][F-3] [F-4][F-2]

•Push and hold [MENU/GRP] for 1 sec. once or twice

to select the menu group

•Push [MENU/GRP] momentarily one or more times to

select the menu

Mode Default Selectable AGC time constant

0.3 (FAST)

OFF, 0.1, 0.2, 0.3, 0.5, 0.8, 1.2,

SSB 2.0 (MID)

1.6, 2.0, 2.5, 3.0, 4.0, 5.0, 6.0

6.0 (SLOW)

0.1 (FAST)

OFF, 0.1, 0.2, 0.3, 0.5, 0.8, 1.2,

CW 0.5 (MID)

1.6, 2.0, 2.5, 3.0, 4.0, 5.0, 6.0

1.2 (SLOW)

0.1 (FAST)

OFF, 0.1, 0.2, 0.3, 0.5, 0.8, 1.2,

RTTY 0.5 (MID)

1.6, 2.0, 2.5, 3.0, 4.0, 5.0, 6.0

1.2 (SLOW)

3.0 (FAST)

OFF, 0.3, 0.5, 0.8, 1.2, 1.6, 2.0,

AM 5.0 (MID)

2.5, 3.0, 4.0, 5.0, 6.0, 7.0, 8.0

7.0 (SLOW)

FM/WFM

0.1 (FAST) Fixed

D IF ﬁlter selection

FUNCTIONS FOR RECEIVE

■ IF ﬁlter selection

The transceiver has 3 passband IF filter widths for

each mode.

For SSB and CW modes, the passband width can be

set from 50 to 3600 Hz in 50 or 100 Hz steps. A total of

41 passband widths are available.

For RTTY mode, the passband width can be set from

50 to 2700 Hz in 50 or 100 Hz steps. A total of 32

passband widths are available.

For AM mode, the passband width can be set from 200

Hz to 10 kHz in 200 Hz steps. A total of 50 passband

widths are available.

For FM mode, the passband width is ﬁxed and 3 pass-

band widths are available.

For WFM mode, the passband width is fixed at 280

kHz.

The filter selection is automatically memorized in

each mode.

The PBT shift frequencies are automatically memo-

rized in each ﬁlter.

q Select the desired mode.

w Select

e Push [F-3

FFIILL

] momentarily several times to se-

lect the IF ﬁlter 1, 2 or 3.

•The selected ﬁlter number is displayed in the LCD.

•The filter setting window appears and shows the se-

lected passband width and shift frequency. (The filter

setting window can be turned OFF in the display set

mode. (p. 125)

The IF ﬁlter for WFM mode is ﬁxed and cannot be

changed.

SPCH

/LOCK

TUNER

/CALL

XFC

V/M

F-1

F-2

FIL

MODE

GENE

123

456

789

F-INP

ENT

1.8 3.5 7

10 14 18

21 24 28

50 144 430

HM-151

FIL

Passband

width

Selected IF filter

Shift

frequency

Popup indicator appears

•Push and hold [MENU/GRP] for 1 sec. once or twice

to select the menu group

•Push [MENU/GRP] momentarily one or more times to

select the menu

[MENU/GRP] [F-3]

FUNCTIONS FOR RECEIVE

q Select SSB, CW, RTTY or AM mode.

•Passband widths for FM and WFM modes are fixed

and cannot be set.

w Select

e Push [F-3

FFIILL

] for 1 sec. to enter ﬁlter set mode.

r Push [F-3

FFIILL

] several times to select the desired

IF ﬁlter.

t While pushing and holding [F-1

BBWW

], rotate [DIAL]

to set the desired passband width.

•The passband width can be set within the range as

shown in the table to the right.

•Push [F-2

DDEEFF

] for 1 sec. to select the default value.

y Repeat steps r to t if desired.

u Push [

(

GRP

)] to exit the ﬁlter set mode.

The PBT shift frequencies are cleared when the

passband width is changed.

This ﬁlter set mode screen graphically displays the

PBT shift frequencies.

*: When the IF ﬁlter is selected FIL2 or FIL3 in the FM

mode operation, the Tx IF ﬁlter’s passband width is

ﬁxed narrow selection (2.5 kHz).

FIL1

Mode Filter Default Range (Steps)

3.0 kHz

1.8 kHz

2.4 kHz

1.2 kHz

250 Hz

7.0 kHz

500 Hz

2.4 kHz

250 Hz

500 Hz

9.0 kHz

3.0 kHz

6.0 kHz

10 kHz Fixed

15 kHz

50–500 Hz (50 Hz)/

600–3.6 kHz (100 Hz)

50–500 Hz (50 Hz)/

600–3.6 kHz (100 Hz)

50–500 Hz (50 Hz)/

600–2.7 kHz (100 Hz)

200 Hz–10.0 kHz

(200 Hz)

FIL2

SSB

RTTY

FM*

WFM

FIL3

FIL1

FIL2

FIL3

FIL1

FIL2

FIL3

FIL1

FIL2

FIL3

FIL1

FIL2

280 kHz FixedFIL

FIL3

[MENU/GRP] [DIAL][F-2] [F-3][F-1]

Selected IF filter

Passband

width

Shift

frequency

•Push and hold [MENU/GRP] for 1 sec. once or twice

to select the menu group

•Push [MENU/GRP] momentarily one or more times to

select the menu

D FIlter passband width setting (SSB/CW/RTTY/AM only)

D IF fIlter shape (SSB/CW only)

The type of DSP ﬁlter shape for each SSB and CW

can be selected independently from soft and sharp.

q Select SSB or CW mode.

w Select

e Push [F-3

FFIILL

] for 1 sec. to enter ﬁlter set mode.

r Push [F-3

FFIILL

] several times to select the desired

IF ﬁlter.

t Push [F-4] to select the ﬁlter shape from “

SSHHAARRPP

”

and “

SSOOFFTT

.”

y Push [

(

GRP

)] to exit the ﬁlter set mode.

Speciﬁed selectivity (p. 148) is measured with this

parameter set to SHARP.

Push

[MENU/GRP] [F-3] [F-4]

•Push and hold [MENU/GRP] for 1 sec. once or twice

to select the menu group

•Push [MENU/GRP] momentarily one or more times to

select the menu

FUNCTIONS FOR RECEIVE

The general PBT (Passband Tuning) function elec-

tronically narrows the IF passband width by shifting the

IF frequency slightly outside of the IF ﬁlter passband

to reject interference. This transceiver uses the DSP

circuit for the PBT function. Moving both [PBT/M-ch/RIT]

controls to the same position shifts the IF.

➥ Push [PBT/M-ch/RIT] momentarily to select the

twin PBT function, if the M-ch-RIT is selected.

•[PBT/M-ch/RIT] indicator (Green) lights.

• The passband settings window shows the passband

width and shift frequency graphically. (The passband

settings window can be turned OFF in the display set

mode. p. 125)

➥ When

is selected, push and hold [F-3

FFIILL

] for

1 sec. to enter the ﬁlter set mode. Current passband

width and shift frequency is displayed in the ﬁlter set

mode.

➥ To set the [PBT/M-ch/RIT] controls to the center posi-

tions, push and hold [PBT/M-ch/RIT(

CLR

)] for 1 sec.

The limit of the variable range depends on the pass-

band width and mode. The limit of the variable range is

half of the passband width, and PBT is adjustable in

100 (AM) or 25 Hz steps (other modes).

•[PBT] controls should normally be set to the center posi-

tions (PBT setting is cleared) when there is no interfer-

ence.

•When PBT is used, the audio tone may be changed.

•Not available for FM or WFM modes.

•While rotating [PBT], noise may occur. This comes from

the DSP unit and does not indicate an equipment mal-

function.

Passband

width

Selected IF filter

Shift

frequency

Popup indicator appears

Dot indicator appears

when PBT is activate

[MENU/GRP]

[F-3]

[PBT/M-ch/RIT] indicator

[PBT/M-ch/RIT(CLR)] switch/[PBT] (inner) control

[PBT] (outer) control

PBT OPERATION EXAMPLE

IF center frequency Interference Desired signal

Passband

Both controls at

center position

Cutting the lower

passband

Cutting both higher and

lower passbands

Interference Interference

Desired signal

Passband

■ Twin PBT operation

FUNCTIONS FOR RECEIVE

Noise blanker set mode

■ Noise blanker

The noise blanker eliminates pulse-type noise such

as from car ignitions. The noise blanker is not avail-

able for WFM mode.

➥ Push [NB/ADJ] momentarily to toggle the noise

blanker ON and OFF.

•“ ” indicator appears when the NB function is ON.

When using the noise blanker, received signals

may be distorted if they are excessively strong or

the noise type is other than impulse. Nearby strong

signals can also cause the noise blanker to create

distortion. Turn the noise blanker function OFF, or

adjust the noise blanker level to a shallower setting

(see below) in this case.

[NB/ADJ]

Appears

q Push and hold [NB/ADJ] for 1 sec. to enter the

noise blanker set mode.

w Push [F-1

≤≤

] or [F-2

≥≥

] to select the desired set

item.

e Rotate [DIAL] to adjust the desired condition.

•Push [F-4

DDEEFF

] for 1 sec. to return to default value.

r Push [NB/ADJ] (or push [

(

GRP

)]) to exit the

noise blanker set mode.

[MENU/GRP]

[NB/ADJ]

[F-1] [F-2]

[F-4] [DIAL]

NNBB LLeevveell

This item adjusts the noise blanker level. The noise

blanker level can be adjusted from 0 to 100%.

 50%

50% (default)

NNBB WWiiddtthh

This item adjusts the noise blanker width. The noise

blanker width can be adjusted from 1 to 100.

 50

50 (default)

FUNCTIONS FOR RECEIVE

■ Noise reduction

The noise reduction function enhances desired sig-

nals in the presence of noise by using the DSP cir-

cuit. The amount of enhancement is adjustable.

➥ Push [NR/LEV] momentarily to toggle the noise re-

duction ON and OFF.

•“ ” indicator appears when the NR function is ON.

The noise reduction level can result in audio signal

masking. Set the noise reduction level for maxi-

mum readability as described below.

Noise reduction OFF Noise reduction activated

Desired

signal (CW)

Noise components

NR Level

[MENU/GRP] [NR/LEV][F-4] [DIAL]

Appears

NNRR LLeevveell

This item adjusts the noise reduction level. The noise

reduction level can be adjusted from 0 to 15.

 4

4 (default)

Noise reduction set mode

q Push [NR/LEV] for 1 sec. to enter the noise reduc-

tion level set mode.

w Rotate [DIAL] to adjust the noise reduction level.

•Set the noise reduction level 0 to 15.

•Push [F-4

DDEEFF

] for 1 sec. to return to default level.

e Push [NR/LEV] (or push [

(

GRP

)]) to exit the

noise reduction level set mode.

FUNCTIONS FOR RECEIVE

Auto notch function

■ Notch function

This transceiver has auto and manual notch func-

tions. The auto notch function automatically attenu-

ates up to 3 beat tones, tuning signals, etc., even if

they are moving. The manual notch can be set to at-

tenuate a frequency via the manual notch filter set

mode.

➥ While in SSB and AM modes, push [ANF/

•

REC] or

[MNF/ADJ] to toggle the notch function between

auto, manual and OFF.

•Both of the auto and manual notch functions can be ac-

tivated at the same time.

➥ While in CW and RTTY modes, push [MNF/ADJ]

to toggle the manual notch function ON and OFF.

➥ While in FM mode, push [ANF/

•

REC] to toggle the

auto notch function ON and OFF.

•“ ” appears when auto notch function is in use.

•“ ” appears when manual notch function is in use.

•Manual notch ﬁlter settings are described on the next

page.

The auto notch can be used in SSB, AM and FM

modes.

➥ Push [ANF/

•

REC] momentarily to turn the auto-

matic notch function ON and OFF.

•“ ” appears when auto notch function is in use.

[ANF/•REC]

Appears

Unwanted interference

Desired

signal (AF)

Desired

signal (AF)

Interference frequency

is attenuated

Auto notch OFF Auto notch ON

Manual notch function

FUNCTIONS FOR RECEIVE

q Push [MNF/ADJ] for 1 sec. to enter the manual

notch ﬁlter set mode.

w Push [F-2

NNFF11

] or [F-3

NNFF22

] to select the desired

ﬁlter ON and OFF.

e Rotate [DIAL] to adjust the selected filter fre-

quency.

•Push [F-4

NNWW

] to toggle the filter width from narrow,

middle and wide.

r Push [MNF/ADJ] (or push [

(

GRP

)]) to exit

the manual notch ﬁlter set mode.

While adjusting the manual notch ﬁlter, noise may

be heard. This comes from the DSP unit and does

not indicate an equipment malfunction.

[MENU/GRP]

[MNF/ADJ]

[F-2] [F-3]

[F-4] [DIAL]

The manual notch function can be used in SSB, CW,

RTTY and AM modes.

➥ Push [MNF/ADJ] momentarily to turn the manual

notch function ON and OFF.

•“ ” appears when manual notch function is in use.

•Set the frequency for manual notch filtering via the

manual notch ﬁlter set mode. (shown below)

•Even when both of the manual notch ﬁlters, “

NNFF11

” and

“

NNFF22

,” are set to OFF in the manual notch filter set

mode, “

NNFF11

” is automatically turned ON if the manual

notch function is ON.

[MNF/ADJ]

Appears

D Manual notch ﬁlter set mode

FUNCTIONS FOR RECEIVE

■ Meter peak hold function

The S-meter has a peak level holding function. The

peak level of the received signal strength is indicated

for 0.5 sec. (approx). This function can be deactivated

in the display set mode (“

MMeetteerr PPeeaakk HHoolldd

” ;

see p. 125) if desired.

q Push [AF(

SET

)] momentarily to enter the set mode

menu.

w Push [F-2

DDIISSPP

] to enter the display set mode.

e Push [F-1

≤≤

] or [F-2

≥≥

] to select “

MMeetteerr PPeeaakk

HHoolldd

.”

r Rotate [DIAL] to turn the meter peak hold setting

ON and OFF.

•Push [F-4

DDEEFF

] for 1 sec. to return to default condition.

t Push [

(

GRP

)] twice to return to normal op-

erating mode.

Initial reception of a

signal results in an

S-meter reading of

40 dB.

The highest indica-

ted bar remains dis-

played for about 0.5

sec. even when the

signal strength de-

creases.

[EXAMPLE]:

S7 60dB40209531

[MENU/GRP] [F-2][F-1] [DIAL]

[AF]

■ Voice squelch control function

This function is useful when you don't want to hear

unmodulated signals. When the voice squelch control

function is activated, the transceiver checks received

signals for voice components.

If a receiver signal includes voice components, and

the tone of the voice components changes within 1

sec., squelch opens. If the received signal includes

no voice components or the tone of the voice compo-

nents does not change within 1 sec., squelch closes.

q Select

w Push [F-4

VVSSCC

] to turn the VSC (Voice Squelch

Control) function ON.

•“”appears when the function is activated.

•The VSC function is available for phone modes

(SSB, AM, FM, WFM).

•The VSC function can also be used for scanning

operation in AM, FM or WFM modes. (p. 112)

[MENU/GRP] [F-4]

Appears

•Push and hold [MENU/GRP] for 1 sec. once or twice

to select the menu group

•Push [MENU/GRP] momentarily one or more times to

select the menu

FUNCTIONS FOR TRANSMIT

D Adjusting the VOX function

■ VOX function

The VOX (Voice-Operated Transmission) function

switches between transmit and receive with your

voice. This function provides an opportunity for

hands-free operation or to input log entries into your

computer, etc., while operating.

q Select a phone mode (SSB, AM, FM) with [MODE].

w Select

e Push [F-1

VVOOXX

] to toggle the VOX function ON

and OFF.

•“ ”appears while the VOX is in use.

The VOX gain, ANTI-VOX and VOX delay can be set in

VOX set mode.

[MENU/GRP] [F-1]

Appears

•Push and hold [MENU/GRP] for 1 sec. once or twice

to select the menu group

•Push [MENU/GRP] momentarily one or more times to

select the menu

q Select a phone mode (SSB, AM, FM).

w Select

e Push and hold [F-1

VVOOXX

] for 1 sec. to enter the

VOX set mode.

r Select the VOX gain item using [F-1

≤≤

] or [F-2

≥≥

t While speaking into the microphone, rotate [DIAL]

to the point where the transceiver is continuously

transmitting.

y Adjust the VOX delay for a convenient interval be-

fore returning to receive.

-Select the VOX delay item using [F-1

≤≤

] or [F-2

≥≥

-Rotate [DIAL].

u If the receive audio from the speaker causes the

VOX circuit to switch to, adjust the anti-VOX set-

ting to the point where speaker audio does not ac-

tivate the VOX.

•Push and hold [MENU/GRP] for 1 sec. once or twice

to select the menu group

•Push [MENU/GRP] momentarily one or more times to

select the menu

[MENU/GRP] [F-2] [DIAL][F-1]

D VOX set mode

FUNCTIONS FOR TRANSMIT

VVOOXX DDeellaayy

This item adjusts the VOX (Voice-activated Transmit)

delay time. The delay time can be adjusted from 0 to

2.0 sec. in 0.1 sec. steps.

•Push [F-4

DDEEFF

] for 1 sec. to return to default delay time.

0.2s

0.2 sec. (default)

VVOOXX GGaaiinn

This item adjusts the VOX gain for the VOX (voice ac-

tivated transmit) function.

This setting can be adjusted

from 0 to 100% in 1% steps.

•Push [F-4

DDEEFF

] for 1 sec. to return to default gain.

50%

50% (default)

AAnnttii--VVOOXX

This item adjusts the ANTI-VOX gain for the VOX

(voice activated transmit) function.

This setting can be

adjusted from 0 to 100% in 1% steps.

•Push [F-4

DDEEFF

] for 1 sec. to return to default gain.

50%

50% (default)

■ Transmit ﬁlter width setting (SSB only)

The transmit filter width for SSB mode can be se-

lected from wide, middle and narrow.

q Select an SSB mode (USB or LSB) with [MODE].

w Select

e Push and hold [F-4

TTBBWW

] for 1 sec. once or twice

to select the desired transmit ﬁlter width from nar-

row, middle and wide.

•Push [F-4

TTBBWW

] momentarily to display the selected TX

ﬁlter width.

•The transmit filter width window appears for showing

the selected TX filter width each time [F-4

TTBBWW

] is

pushed.

•The following ﬁlters are speciﬁed as the default. Each

of the filter widths can be set in the quick set mode.

(pgs. 121, 122)

WIDE : 100 Hz to 2900 Hz

MID : 300 Hz to 2700 Hz

NAR : 500 Hz to 2500 Hz

•Push and hold [MENU/GRP] for 1 sec. once or twice

to select the menu group

•Push [MENU/GRP] momentarily one or more times to

select the menu

[MENU/GRP] [F-4]

FUNCTIONS FOR TRANSMIT

D Full break-in operation

D Semi break-in operation

■ Break-in function

During semi break-in operation, the transceiver se-

lects transmit when keying, then automatically returns

to receive after a pre-set time from when you stop

keying.

•Semi break-in operation

q Push [MODE] to select CW or CW-R mode.

w Select

e Push [F-1

BBRRKK

] once or twice to turn the semi

break-in function ON.

•“”appears.

When using a paddle, set “

KKeeyy SSppeeeedd

” in the

quick set mode to adjust the keying speed. (p. 122)

•Break-in delay setting

q Push [MODE] to select CW or CW-R mode.

w Select

e Push and hold [F-1

BBRRKK

] for 1 sec. to enter the

break-in delay time set mode.

r Rotate [DIAL] to set the break-in delay time (the

delay from transmit to receive).

[MENU/GRP] [F-1] [DIAL]

[MENU/GRP] [F-1]

Appears

•Push and hold [MENU/GRP] for 1 sec. once or twice

to select the menu group

•Push [MENU/GRP] momentarily one or more times to

select the menu

During full break-in operation, the transceiver auto-

matically switches to receive between keying dots

and dashes so that the operator can hear activity on

the channel when transmitting.

q Push [MODE] to select CW or CW-R mode.

w Select

e Push [F-1

BBRRKK

] once or twice to turn the semi

break-in function ON.

•“”appears.

When using a paddle, set “

KKeeyy SSppeeeedd

” in the

quick set mode to adjust the keying speed. (p. 122)

•Push and hold [MENU/GRP] for 1 sec. once or twice

to select the menu group

•Push [MENU/GRP] momentarily one or more times to

select the menu

[MENU/GRP] [F-1]

Appears

The break-in function is used in CW mode to automat-

ically switch the transceiver between transmit and re-

ceive when keying. The IC-7000 is capable of full

break-in or semi break-in.

FUNCTIONS FOR TRANSMIT

■

∂∂

TX function

The ∂TX function shifts the transmit frequency up to

±9.999 kHz in 1 Hz steps (10 Hz steps when can-

celling the 1 Hz step readout) without moving the re-

ceive frequency.

q Push [PBT/M-ch/RIT] momentarily to select the M-

ch/RIT function, if the twin PBT is selected.

•[PBT/M-ch/RIT] indicator (Green) goes out.

w Push and hold [PBT/M-ch/RIT] for 1 sec. to enter

the RIT/∂TX mode.

e Push [F-2

∂∂TTXX

] to turn the ∂TX function ON.

•“ ” indicator and the frequency shift appear when

the function is ON.

r Rotate [RIT] (outer) control to shift the transmitter

frequency.

•The receive frequency is not shifted.

t To reset the ∂TX frequency, push [F-3

CCLLRR

] for

1 sec.

•Push [F-3

CCLLRR

] momentarily to reset the RIT fre-

quency when “

QQuuiicckk RRIITT//∂∂TTXX CClleeaarr

” in the

miscellaneous (others) set mode is ON. (p. 133)

y To cancel the ∂TX function, push [F-2

∂∂TTXX

] mo-

mentarily again.

•“ ” indicator disappears.

u Push [

(

GRP

)] to exit the RIT/∂TX mode.

When RIT and ∂TX are ON at the same time,

[RIT] (outer) control shifts both the transmit and re-

ceive frequencies from the displayed frequency at

the same time.

Push for 1sec.

Push

Rotate

Appear

Reset to

“0.00k”

[MENU/GRP] [F-2] [F-3]

[PBT/M-ch/RIT] indicator

[PBT/M-ch/RIT] switch

[RIT] (outer)

∂TX

•Calculate function

The frequency shift of the (RIT or) ∂TX function can

be added/subtracted to the displayed frequency.

While displaying the (RIT and/or) ∂TX shift fre-

quency, push and hold ([F-1

RRIITT

] or) [F-2

∂∂TTXX

] for

1 sec.

•Practical example

When you ﬁnd a DX station on 21.025 MHz/CW and

the station is picking up stations transmitting slightly

up from 21.025 MHz.

q Push [F-1

RRIITT

] and [F-2

∂∂TTXX

] to turn both the

RIT and ∂TX functions ON.

w Rotate [RIT] (outer) to find the DX station’s re-

ceive frequency.

e When you ﬁnd the DX station’s receive frequency,

push [F-1

RRIITT

] to turn the RIT function OFF.

•Now you can transmit the DX station’s receive fre-

quency and receive the DX station’s transmit fre-

quency (21.025 MHz).

r Start transmitting while the station is standing by.

Push and hold

FUNCTIONS FOR TRANSMIT

The IC-7000 has a built-in, low distortion speech com-

pressor circuit. This circuit increases your average

talk power in SSB mode and is especially useful for

DX-ing or noisy condition when the receiving station

is having difﬁculty copying your signal.

q Select an SSB mode.

w Select

e Push [F-2

CCOOMM

] momentarily to turn the speech

compressor function ON and OFF.

•“” appears.

[MENU/GRP] [F-2]

Appears

•Push and hold [MENU/GRP] for 1 sec. once or twice

to select the menu group

•Push [MENU/GRP] momentarily one or more times to

select the menu

■ Speech compressor

■ Monitor function

The monitor function allows you to monitor your trans-

mitted signals in any mode through the speaker. The

CW side tone functions regardless of the monitor

function setting.

q Push [AF(

SET

)] momentarily to enter the set mode

menu.

w Push [F-4

OOTTHH

] to enter the miscellaneous (oth-

ers) set mode.

e Push [F-1

≤≤

] several times to select “

MMoonniittoorr

.”

r Rotate [DIAL] to turn the monitor function ON.

•Push [F-4

DDEEFF

] for 1 sec. to return to default condition.

t Push [F-2

≥≥

] to select “

MMoonniittoorr LLeevveell

.”

y Rotate [DIAL] to adjust the monitor level.

•Push [F-4

DDEEFF

] for 1 sec. to return to default level.

u Push [

(

GRP

)] twice to return to normal op-

erating mode.

Use headphones to prevent feedback.

[MENU/GRP] [DIAL]

[AF]

[F-4][F-1] [F-2]

FUNCTIONS FOR TRANSMIT

CCOOMMPP LLeevveell

This item adjusts the speech compression level. The

speech compression level can be adjusted from 0 to

10.

•Push [F-4

DDEEFF

] for 1 sec. to return to default level.

5

5 (default)

D Compression level setting

•Pre-setting the transceiver

q Select an SSB mode.

w Turn the speech compressor function OFF, if it’s

ON.

●

Select

●

Push [F-2

CCOOMM

] momentarily to turn the speech

compressor function OFF.

•“” disappears.

e Select ALC meter.

●

Select

●

Push [F-3

MMEETT

] one or more times to select the

ALC meter.

•“ALC” appears.

r Adjust the MIC gain.

●

Push [AF(

SET

)] momentarily to enter the set

mode menu.

●

Push [F-1

QQSS

] to enter the quick set mode.

●

Push [F-1 Y] or [F-2 Z] to select “

MMIICC GGaaiinn

.”

●

Push [PTT] (microphone) to transmit at your

normal voice level.

●

While speaking into the microphone, rotate

[DIAL] so that the ALC meter reads within the

ALC zone, whether you speak softly or loudly.

●

Push [Z(

GRP

)] twice to return normal op-

erating mode.

•Compression level setting

q Select COMP meter.

●

Select

●

Push [F-3

MMEETT

] one or more times to select the

COMP meter.

•“” appears.

w Turn ON the speech compressor function and

enter the speech compression level set mode.

●

Select

●

Push and hold [F-2

CCOOMM

] for 1 sec. to enter the

speech compression level set mode.

•speech compressor function automatically turns ON.

e Rotate [DIAL] so that the COMP meter reads be-

tween 10 dB to 20 dB.

NOTE:

When the ALC meter peaks exceed the

ALC zone, your transmitted voice may be distorted.

Adjust ‘COMP LEVEL’ so that the ALC meter

peaks within the ALC zone.

ALC zone

ALC

Appears

•Push and hold [MENU/GRP] for 1 sec. once or

twice to select the menu group

•Push [MENU/GRP] momentarily one or more times

to select the menu

[DIAL][MENU/GRP] [F-2] [F-3]

•Push and hold [MENU/GRP] for 1 sec. once or

twice to select the menu group

•Push [MENU/GRP] momentarily one or more times

to select the menu

[DIAL][MENU/GRP]

[AF]

[F-2] [F-3][F-1]

FUNCTIONS FOR TRANSMIT

■ Split frequency operation

q Select VFO A and set the frequency to 21.290 MHz

(USB).

•[F-4

VV//MM

] is available when

appears.

•[F-2

AA//BB

] is available when

appears.

w Push [F-1

SSPPLL

] momentarily (in the

menu) to

turn the split function ON, then push and hold [F-2

AA//BB

] (

) for 1 sec.

•The equalized transmit (VFO B) frequency and “ ”

appear on the LCD.

•The quick split function is much more convenient for

selecting the transmit frequency. See the next page for

details.

e Rotate [DIAL] while pushing and holding [F-4

XXFFCC

] (

) to set the transmit frequency to 21.310

MHz.

•[XFC] on the HM-151 can also be used.

•The transmit frequency can be monitored while pushing

and holding [F-4

XXFFCC

r Now you can receive on 21.290 MHz and transmit

on 21.310 MHz.

To swap the transmit and receive frequencies, push

[F-2

AA//BB

] (

) to exchange the VFO A and VFO B.

DIRECT SHIFT FREQUENCY INPUT

The shift frequency can be entered directly.

q Push [F-INP/ENT] (HM-151).

w Enter the desired shift frequency with the digit

keys.

•1 kHz to 1 MHz shifts can be entered.

•When you require a minus shift direction, push [50/•]

before entering the shift.

e Push [F-1

SSPPLL

] (

) on the transceiver’s front

panel.

•The shift frequency is input to the sub readout and the

split function is turned ON.

[EXAMPLE]

SPLIT LOCK FUNCTION

Accidentally releasing [F-4

XXFFCC

] (

) while rotating

[DIAL] changes the receive frequency. To prevent

this, use both the split lock and dial lock functions to

change the transmit frequency only. The split lock

function cancels the dial lock function while pushing

and holding [F-4

XXFFCC

] (

) during split frequency

operation.

The dial lock’s effectiveness during split frequency op-

eration can be selected in the miscellaneous (others)

set mode for both receive and transmit frequencies;

or only the receive frequency. (p. 129)

CONVENIENT

F-INP

ENT

F-INP

ENT

1.8

To operate on 1 kHz

higher frequency:

HM-151

Transceiver

(SPL)

Transceiver

To operate on 3 kHz

lower frequency:

CONVENIENT

2.4k

SFT

FIL2

USB

VFO

USB

FIL2

14.100.00

VFO

SPLIT

ANT

METER

P.AMP

ATT

OFF

12:00

2.4k

SFT

FIL2

USB

VFO

USB

FIL2

14.100.00

VFO

SPLIT

ANT

METER

P.AMP

ATT

OFF

12:00

2.4k

SFT

FIL2

USB

VFO

USB

FIL2

14.100.00

VFO

ANT

METER

P.AMP

ATT

OFF

12:00

Split frequency operation allows you to transmit and

receive in the same mode on two different frequencies.

The split frequency operation is basically performed

using 2 VFO frequencies (VFO A and VFO B) on the

main and sub readouts.

The following is an example of setting 21.290 MHz for

receiving and 21.310 MHz for transmitting.

[DIAL][MENU/GRP] [F-1] [F-2] [F-4]

FUNCTIONS FOR TRANSMIT

■ Quick split function

q Suppose you are operating at 21.290 MHz (USB)

in VFO A.

w Push and hold [F-1

SSPPLL

] (

) for 1 sec.

•Split frequency operation is turned ON.

•The VFO A and VFO B are equalized.

e While pushing and holding [F-4

XXFFCC

] (

), rotate

[DIAL] to set the frequency offset between trans-

mit and receive.

•[XFC] on the HM-151 can also be used.

•The transmit frequency can be monitored while pushing

and holding [F-4

XXFFCC

2.4k

SFT

FIL2

USB

VFO

USB

FIL2

14.100.00

VFO

SPLIT

ANT

METER

P.AMP

ATT

OFF

12:00

2.4k

SFT

FIL2

USB

VFO

USB

FIL2

14.100.00

VFO

SPLIT

ANT

METER

P.AMP

ATT

OFF

2.4k

SFT

FIL2

USB

VFO

USB

FIL2

14.100.00

VFO

ANT

METER

P.AMP

ATT

OFF

12:00

When you are searching for DX stations and you

suspect that a DX station may say “up ‘X’ kHz” for

their receive frequency:

OPERATION 1

q Push and hold [F-1

SSPPLL

] (

) for 1 sec. to

standby for split operation.

w If the DX station’s operator says “up 10 kHz.”

•Push [F-INP/ENT], [1], [0] then [F-1

SSPPLL

] (

•Or, rotate the tuning dial.

OPERATION 2

If the DX station’s operator says “down 5 kHz” be-

fore you enter standby for split operation:

➥ Push [F-INP/ENT], [•], [5] then [F-1

SSPPLL

] (

•The split function is turned ON and “5 kHz down” fre-

quency is entered in the sub readout.

PRACTICAL EXAMPLE

When you are working a pile-up and you want to

start split frequency operation to simplify picking out

stations:

q Push [F-1

SSPPLL

] (

) momentarily, and push

and hold [F-2

AA//BB

] (

) for 1 sec.

•The transmit (VFO B) frequency is equalized to the re-

ceive (VFO A) frequency and “ ” appears.

w Rotate [DIAL] to set your receive frequency in the

VFO A.

e Announce your receive frequency.

r After you catch one of the calling stations’ call

signs, push and hold the PTT switch to respond.

•While pushing and holding [F-4

XXFFCC

], you can moni-

tor your transmit frequency.

PRACTICAL EXAMPLE

When you ﬁnd a DX station, an important considera-

tion is how to set the split frequency.

When you push and hold [F-1

SSPPLL

] (

MM--11

) for 1 sec., split

frequency operation is turned ON, the undisplayed VFO is

automatically changed according to the plus/minus shift fre-

quency programmed in the miscellaneous (others) set

mode (p. 129) or equalized with the displayed VFO when

0.000 MHz (default) is programmed as the split offset fre-

quency.

This shortens the time needed to start split frequency

operation.

Quick split operation is turned ON by default but can be

turned OFF in the miscellaneous (others) set mode (p. 129).

Menu selection (Example: M-1)

•Push [MENU/GRP] for 1 sec. once or twice to select

the menu group

. Selection from:

(Graphic)

•Push [MENU/GRP] momentarily one or more times to

select the menu

. Selection from:

[DIAL][MENU/GRP]

[AF]

[F-1] [F-2] [F-4]

FUNCTIONS FOR TRANSMIT

D Quick split setting

q Enter the miscellaneous (others) set mode as

above.

w Push [F-1

≤≤

] or [F-2

≥≥

] to select “

QQuuiicckk

SSPPLLIITT

,” then rotate [DIAL] to select the desired

setting.

•Push [F-4

DDEEFF

] for 1 sec. to return to default setting.

e Push [

(

GRP

)] twice to return the normal op-

erating mode.

Split offset frequency setting

By setting an often-used split frequency offset in ad-

vance, you can operate the quick split function to se-

lect split operation at the push of one key.

q Push [AF(

SET

)] momentarily to enter the set mode

menu.

w Push [F-4

OOTTHH

] to enter the miscellaneous (oth-

ers) set mode.

e Push [F-1

≤≤

] or [F-2

≥≥

] to select “

SSPPLLIITT OOffff--

sseett

.”

r Rotate [DIAL] to set the desired split offset.

•The split offset can be selected from –9.999 MHz to

+9.999 MHz.

•Push [F-4

DDEEFF

] for 1 sec. to return to default value.

t Push [

(

GRP

)] twice to return the normal op-

erating mode.

[DIAL][MENU/GRP]

[AF]

[F-1] [F-2] [F-4]

D Plot measurement

FUNCTIONS FOR TRANSMIT

The IC-7000 has a built-in circuit for measuring an-

tenna SWR—no external equipment or special adjust-

ments are necessary.

The IC-7000 can measure SWR in 2 ways—spot mea-

surement and plot measurement.

q Select CW or RTTY operation with [MODE].

w Conﬁrm that the output power is over 30 W.

e Select

r Push [F-3

MMEETT

] one or more times to select the

SWR meter.

t Key down or push [PTT] to transmit; then read the

actual SWR from the meter.

➠ ≤ 1.5 well matched antenna

➠ > 1.5 check antenna or cable connection, etc.

[MENU/GRP] [F-3]

The best match is in this range.

SWR 1 1.5 2

∞

Plot measurement allows you to measure the SWR

over an entire band.

q Conﬁrm that the output power is over 30 W.

w Set the center frequency for the SWR to be mea-

sured.

e Select

(SWR meter).

r Push and hold [F-4

SSTTEEPP

] for 1 sec. one or more

times to select the desired measuring step from 10,

50, 100 and 500 kHz.

t Push [F-2] or [F-3] one or more times to select the

desired number of measuring steps from 3, 5, 7, 9,

11, and 13 steps.

y Push [F-1] to start the measuring.

u Push and hold [PTT] on the microphone to mea-

sure the SWR.

•Frequency marker, “∫,” appears below SWR graph.

•RTTY mode is automatically selected.

i When releasing [PTT], the frequency marker and

frequency indication move to the next frequency to

be measured.

o Repeat steps u and i to measure SWR over the

entire frequency range.

!0 When the measured SWR is less than 1.5:1, the

antenna is well matched with the transceiver in the

measured frequency range.

Push [F-1] to start

mesuring.

Push [F-2] or [F-3] to select number of

SWR mesuring steps.

Frequency marker appears and moves

after measurement.

Push [F-4] to Select

SWR mesuring steps.

• Measuring (after pushing [F1])

The antenna is well matched in this range

1.0 : 1

1.5 : 1

2.0 : 1

3.0 : 1

4.0 : 1

■ Measuring SWR

D Spot measurement

Menu selection (Example: S-1)

•Push [MENU/GRP] for 1 sec. once or twice to select

the menu group

. Selection from:

(Graphic)

•Push [MENU/GRP] momentarily one or more times to

select the menu

. Selection from:

VOICE RECORDER FUNCTIONS

■ Digital voice recorder

The transceiver has digital voice memories, up to 4

channels for transmit, and up to 99 channels for re-

ceive. A maximum message length of 120 sec. can be

recorded into a receive channel (total message length

for all channels of up to 1500 sec.), and a total mes-

sage length of 90 sec. can be recorded in transmit

channels.

Providing a transmission memory is very convenient

for repeated CQ and number transmissions at contest

times, as well as when making consecutive calls in

DX’pedition.

■ Recording a received audio

D Basic recording

q Select the desired frequency and mode.

w Select

e Push [F-1

VVOO

] to call up the voice recorder menu.

•If the transmit voice memory channels (T1–T4) screen

appears, push [

(

GRP

)] then push [F-1

RRXX

] to

select the receive voice memory channel.

•If the voice root menu appears, push [F-1

RRXX

] to select

the receive voice memory menu. The voice recorder

starting menu can be changed in the miscellaneous

(others) set mode. (p. 134)

r Push and hold [ANF/

•

REC] for 1 sec. to start

recording while receiving a signal.

•Records audio into the new channel.

•“ ”appears and the recording timer counts up.

•The operating frequency, mode and current time are

programmed as the memory names automatically.

t Push and hold [ANF/

•

REC] for 1 sec. again to

stop recording.

•“ ”disappears.

•Recording is automatically terminated after 120 sec. or

when a total of the recorded time becomes 1500 sec.

y Push [

(

GRP

)] twice to exit the voice recoder

mode.

MIC Memo FUNCTION

While recordig received audio, speak into microphone

(without pushing [PTT]) to record your comment, im-

pression or some information with recorded audio.

This function can be activated in the voice set mode.

(p. 99)

[MENU/GRP] [F-1] [F-2] [ANF/•REC]

CONVENIENT

The voice recoder stores the received audio in 15

sec. blocks. Thus the total recording time is re-

duced by 15 sec. each time recording is stopped.

Menu group selection

Push [MENU/GRP] for 1 sec.

Selection from:

(Graphic)

Menu selection (Example: S)

Push [MENU/GRP] momentarily.

Selection from:

Either

Y or Z

Either

Y or Z

VOICE RECORDER FUNCTIONS

To record the receiving signal contents immediately,

one-touch voice recording is available.

q Push and hold [ANF/

•

REC] for 1 sec. while re-

ceiving a signal to start recording.

•“ ”blinks.

•Records audio into the new channel.

w Push and hold [ANF/

•

REC] for 1 sec. again to

stop recording.

•Recording is automatically terminated after 120 sec. or

when a total of the recorded time becomes 1500 sec.

[ANF/•REC]

Blinks

q Select

w Push [F-1

VVOO

] to call up the voice recorder menu.

•If the transmit voice memory channels (T1–T4) screen

appears, push [

(

GRP

)] then push [F-1

RRXX

] to

select the receive voice memory channel.

•If the voice root menu appears, push [F-1

RRXX

] to select

the receive voice memory menu. The voice recorder

starting menu can be changed in the miscellaneous

(others) set mode.

e Push [F-1

≤≤

] or [F-2

≥≥

] to select the desired

recorded contents, then push [F-3

PPLLYY

] to play-

back.

•“ ”appears.

r Push [F-3

PPLLYY

] again (or push [

(

GRP

)]) to

stop playback, if desired.

•Playback is terminated automatically when all of the

recorded contents in the channel are played.

t Push [

(

GRP

)] twice to exit the voice recoder

mode.

[MENU/GRP] [F-2] [F-3][F-1]

■ Playing the recorded contents

D One-touch voice recording

VOICE RECORDER FUNCTIONS

The recorded contents can be erased independently

by channel.

q Select

w Push [F-1

VVOO

] to call up the voice recorder menu.

•If the transmit voice memory channels (T1–T4) screen

appears, push [

(

GRP

)] then push [F-1

RRXX

] to

select the receive voice memory channel.

•If the voice root menu appears, push [F-1

RRXX

] to select

the receive voice memory menu. The voice recorder

starting menu can be changed in the miscellaneous

(others) set mode. (p. 134)

e Push [F-1

≤≤

] or [F-2

≥≥

] to select the desired

recorded channel to be erased, then push and hold

[F-4

CCLLRR

] for 1 sec. to erase the contents.

r Push [

(

GRP

)] twice to exit the voice recoder

mode.

Be careful!—the erased contents CANNOT be re-

called.

[MENU/GRP] [F-2] [F-4][F-1]

■ Erasing the recorded contents

Menu group selection

Push [MENU/GRP] for 1 sec.

Selection from:

(Graphic)

Menu selection (Example: S)

Push [MENU/GRP] momentarily.

Selection from:

Either

Y or Z

Either

Y or Z

Erasing a long message takes a little time, and a maximum message length (120 sec./channel) takes over 1

sec.

When resetting the CPU, the transceiver clears all of the voice memory area (1500 sec.), and it takes almost 30

sec. In these cases, you can use the record function, but you cannot playback the recorded contents during the

clearing process unitil it is completed.

VOICE RECORDER FUNCTIONS

To transmit a message using a voice recorder, record

the desired message in advance as described below.

q Select

w Push [F-1

VVOO

] then [

(

GRP

)] to select the

voice root menu.

•If the voice root menu appears, skip the pushing

[

(

GRP

)]. The voice starting menu can be

changed in the miscellaneous (others) set mode. (p.

134)

e Push [F-3

MMIICC

] to select the voice memory

recording mode.

r Push [

(

GRP

)] then rotate [DIAL] to adjust

the mic gain control so that the “

RREECC LLEEVVEELL

” in-

dicator reads within maximum.

•Speak into the microphone without pushing [PTT].

•Push [F-4

DDEEFF

] to select the default mic gain.

•Push [

(

GRP

)] to exit the mic gain adjustment

condition.

t Push [F-1

≤≤≥≥

] to select the desired memory chan-

nel, then push and hold [F-3

RREECC

] for 1 sec. to

start recording.

•Speak into the microphone without pushing [PTT].

•Previously recorded contents are cleared.

y Push [F-3

RREECC

] again (or push [

(

GRP

)]) to

stop recording.

•Recording is automatically terminated when the total

time of recorded messages, T1–T4, becomes 90 sec.

u Push [

(

GRP

)] twice to exit the voice mem-

ory screen.

[MENU/GRP] [F-3][F-1]

■ Recording a message for transmit

D Recording

D Conﬁrming/Erasing the recorded message

•Playing the recorded contents

q Call up the voice memory recording mode as de-

scribed in steps q to e as shown above.

w Push [F-1

≤≤≥≥

] to select the desired memory chan-

nel, then push [F-2

PPLLYY

] to start playback.

•“ ”appears.

e Push [F-2

PPLLYY

] again to stop playback, if desired.

r Push [

(

GRP

)] twice to exit the voice mem-

ory mode

•Erasing the recoded contents

q Call up the voice memory recording mode as de-

scribed in steps q to e as shown above.

w Push [F-1

≤≤≥≥

] to select the desired memory chan-

nel to be erased, push [F-2

PPLLYY

] to start playback.

•“ ”appears.

e Push and hold [F-4

CCLLRR

] for 1 sec. to erase the

contents.

r Push [

(

GRP

)] twice to exit the voice mem-

ory mode.

VOICE RECORDER FUNCTIONS

Memory channels can be tagged with alphanumeric

names of up to 5 characters each.

Capital letters, small letters, numerals, some symbols

(! # $ % & ¥ ? " ' ` ^ + – ✱ /

: ; = < > ( ) [ ] { } | _

and space can be used. (See the step t below.)

q Record a message as described on the previous

page.

w Call up the voice memory recording mode as de-

scribed in steps q to e (see the instructions for

recording at previous page).

e Push [F-1

≤≤

] or [F-2

≥≥

] to select the desired voice

memory.

r Push [F-4

NNAAMM

] to enter memory name editing.

•Acursor appears and blinks.

•Memory channel names of no-recorded channels

cannnot be selected.

t Push [

(

GRP

)] several times to select the de-

sired character group.

•[ABC], [abc], [123] or [etc] indicates the capital letters,

small letters, numerals or symbols, respectively

y Input the desired character by rotating [DIAL].

•Push [F-1

ÅÅ

] or [F-2

ÇÇ

] for cursor movement.

•Push [F-3

DDEELL

] to delete the selected character.

•Push [F-4

SSPPCC

] to input a space.

•Pushing the HM-151’s keypad, [0]–[9], can also enter

numerals.

u Push [

(

GRP

)] to input and set the name.

•The cursor disappears.

i Repeat steps e to y to program another voice

memory’s name, if desired.

o Push [

(

GRP

)] twice to exit the voice mem-

ory screen.

[MENU/GRP] [F-2] [F-3] [F-4]

[F-1]

■ Programming a memory name for transmit

Menu group selection

Push [MENU/GRP] for 1 sec.

Selection from:

(Graphic)

Menu selection (Example: S)

Push [MENU/GRP] momentarily.

Selection from:

Either

Y or Z

Either

Y or Z

VOICE RECORDER FUNCTIONS

q Select

w Push [F-1

VVOO

] to call up the voice recorder menu.

•If the receive voice memory channels screen appears,

push [

(

GRP

)] then push [F-2

TTXX

] to select the

transmit voice memory channel.

•If the voice root menu appears, push [F-2

TTXX

] to select

the transmit voice memory menu. The voice recorder

starting menu can be changed in the miscellaneous

(others) set mode.

e Push [F-1

TT11

] — [F-4

TT44

] to transmit the con-

tents.

•“

TT11

”– “

TT44

” are highlighted while transmitting.

r Push the selected memory channel key, [F-1

TT11

]

— [F-4

TT44

], again to stop, if desired.

t Push [

(

GRP

)] twice to exit the voice mem-

ory screen.

For your information

When an external keypad is connected to the pin 2

and pin 7 of the [MIC] connecter, the recorded

message, T1–T4, can be transmitted without open-

ing the voice recorder set screen.

See page 135 for details.

[MENU/GRP] [F-2] [F-3] [F-4]

[F-1]

■ Sending a recorded message

q Call up the voice memory recording mode as de-

scribed in steps q to w as above.

w Push [

(

GRP

)] to select the voice memory

transmit level set mode.

e Push the desired memory channel key, [F-1

TT11

]–

[F-3

TT33

], momentarily to transmit the contents.

r Rotate [DIAL] to adjust the transmit voice level.

•Push [F-4

DDEEFF

] to select the default condition.

t Push [

(

GRP

)] to return to the voice recorder

screen.

D Transmit level setting

VOICE RECORDER FUNCTIONS

q Select

w Push [F-1

VVOO

] then [

(

GRP

)] to select the

voice root menu.

•If the voice root menu appears, skip the pushing

[

(

GRP

)]. The voice starting menu can be

changed in the miscellaneous (others) set mode. (p.

134)

e Push [F-4

SSEETT

] to enter the voice recorder set

mode.

r Push [F-1

≤≤

] or [F-2

≥≥

] to select the desired item,

then rotate [DIAL] to set the selected function ON

and OFF.

•Push [F-4

DDEEFF

] for 1 sec. to select the default condi-

tion.

t Push [

(

GRP

)] to return to the voice root

menu.

[MENU/GRP] [F-2] [F-4][F-1]

■ Voice set mode

D Voice set mode

AAuuttoo MMoonniittoorr

This item turns the auto monitor function ON and OFF.

When this function is ON,

the monitor function is auto-

matically turned ON while transmitting a voice mem-

ory message.

•Push [F-4

DDEEFF

] for 1 sec. to return to default setting.

OONN

Automatic monitor function

is ON. (default)

OOFFFF

Automatic monitor function

is OFF.

MMIICC MMeemmoo

This item selects the mic memo function ON and OFF.

When this function is ON,

and you speak into the mi-

crophone (without pushing [PTT]), your voice is

mixed with the received audio and recorded.

This function is convienient when you want to record

some information or comment while recording the re-

ceived audio.

•Push [F-4

DDEEFF

] for 1 sec. to return to default setting.

OONN

MIC memo function is ON.

OOFFFF

MIC memo function is OFF.

(default)

Menu group selection

Push [MENU/GRP] for 1 sec.

Selection from:

(Graphic)

Menu selection (Example: S)

Push [MENU/GRP] momentarily.

Selection from:

Either

Y or Z

Either

Y or Z

■ Memory channel selection

100

MEMORY OPERATION

The transceiver has 501 memory channels including 6

scan edge channels (3 pairs), and 2 call channels. In

addition, a total of 5 memory banks (99 memory chan-

nel each), A to E, are available for usage by group, etc.

Memory mode is very useful for quickly changing to

often-used frequencies.

All 503 memory/call channels are tuneable which

means the programmed frequency can be tuned tem-

porarily with [DIAL], etc., in memory mode.

MEMORY

CHANNEL

MEMORY

CHANNEL

NUMBER

CAPABILITY

TRANSFER

TO VFO

OVER-

WRITING

CLEAR

Regular

(split memory)

1–99

(in each

banks)

Independent transmit and receive

frequencies and one mode in each

memory channel.

In addition, tone frequencies can

also be stored for repeater use.

Yes Yes Yes

Scan edges

1A–3B

(common)

One frequency and one mode in

each memory channel as scan

edges for programmed scan.

Yes Yes No

Call channels

(split memory)

C1, C2

(common)

Same as regular channels, but only

frequencies in 144 MHz (C1), 430

MHz (C2) band can be programmed.

Yes Yes No

■ Memory channels

q Push [PBT/M-ch/RIT] momentarily to select the M-

ch/RIT function, if the twin PBT is selected.

•[PBT/M-ch/RIT] indicator (Green) goes out.

w Select

e Push [F-4

VV//MM

] to select memory mode.

r Rotate [M-ch] (inner) control to select the desired

memory channel.

•All memory channels including blank channels can be

selected.

•Rotating [RIT] (outer) control changes the bank.

•[

]/[

] on the microphone also change the channels.

t To return to VFO mode, push [F-4

VV//MM

] again.

[EXAMPLE]: Selecting memory channel 17.

V/M

[MENU/GRP]

[F-4][RIT] (outer) control

[PBT/M-ch/RIT] indicator

[PBT/M-ch/RIT] switch/[M-ch] (inner) control

•Push and hold [MENU/GRP] for 1 sec. once or twice

to select the menu group

•Push [MENU/GRP] momentarily one or more times to

select the menu

101

MEMORY OPERATION

q Push [PBT/M-ch/RIT] momentarily to select the M-

ch/RIT function, if the twin PBT is selected.

•[PBT/M-ch/RIT] indicator (Green) goes out.

w Set the desired frequency and operating mode in

VFO mode.

•If you want to program the split frequency function, pro-

gram both receive and transmit frequencies into VFO

A and B, then turn ON the split function. (p. 89)

•If you want to program a repeater function, set a tone

frequency (p. 60) in addition to the receive/transmit fre-

quencies.

e Select

r Push [F-1

MMEEMM

] to display the memory channel

contents.

•Memory channel contents appear above the multi-func-

tion key indicator.

•Push [F-1

LLSSTT

] to display the memory channel list.

This is convenient for selecting the desired channel.

Push [

(

GRP

)] to exit the memory channel list.

t Rotate [M-ch] to select the desired memory chan-

nel.

•“ ”and “---,---,--” appear if the selected memory

channel is a blank channel (and does not have con-

tents).

•Rotating [RIT] (outer) control changes the bank.

y Push and hold [F-2

MMWW

] for 1 sec. to program the

displayed frequency and operating mode into the

selected memory channel.

To check the programmed contents, push [F-4

VV//MM

]

to select memory mode.

[EXAMPLE]: Programming 7.088 MHz/LSB into ch 12.

Push for

1 sec.

[F-2]

[PBT/M-ch/RIT] indicator

[PBT/M-ch/RIT] switch/[M-ch] (inner) control

[MENU/GRP]

[RIT] (outer) control

■ Memory programming

D Programming in VFO mode

Memory channel programming can be performed ei-

ther in VFO mode or in memory mode.

Menu group selection

Push [MENU/GRP] for 1 sec.

Selection from:

(Graphic)

Menu selection (Example: M)

Push [MENU/GRP] momentarily.

Selection from:

Either

Y or Z

Either

Y or Z

102

MEMORY OPERATION

q Push [PBT/M-ch/RIT] momentarily to select the M-

ch/RIT function, if the twin PBT is selected.

•[PBT/M-ch/RIT] indicator (Green) goes out.

w Select

e Push [F-4

VV//MM

] to select memory mode, then se-

lect the desired memory channel with [M-ch].

•Memory channel contents appear instead of the VFO’s

frequency readout.

r Set the desired frequency and operating mode.

•To program a blank channel, push [

(

BAND

)] or

[

(

BAND

)] to select the desired band or use direct fre-

quency entry with the keypad (HM-151).

t Push and hold [F-2

MMWW

] for 1 sec. to program the

displayed frequency and operating mode into the

memory channel.

[EXAMPLE]:

Programming 21.280 MHz/USB into

ch 18.

Push for

1 sec.

[MENU/GRP]

[PBT/M-ch/RIT] indicator

[PBT/M-ch/RIT] switch/[M-ch] (inner) control

[F-2] [F-4]

[Y]

[Z]

D Programming in memory mode

103

MEMORY OPERATION

q Select

w Push [F-4

VV//MM

] to select memory mode.

e Push [F-1] (

MMEEMM

LLSSTT

) twice to enter the memory

channel list.

r Push [PBT/M-ch/RIT] momentarily to select the M-

ch/RIT function, if the twin PBT is selected.

•[PBT/M-ch/RIT] indicator (Green) goes out.

t Rotate [M-ch] (inner) control to select the desired

memory channel.

•All memory channels including blank channels can be

selected.

•[

]/[

] on the microphone also changes the channels.

y To exit the memory channel list, push

[

(

GRP

)] twice.

Push

Rotate

MEM

LST

[MENU/GRP] [F-1]

[PBT/M-ch/RIT] indicator

[PBT/M-ch/RIT] switch/[M-ch] (inner) control

[F-4]

■ Memory channel list

D Selecting a memory channel using the memory channel list

The memory channel list simultaneously shows 7

memory channels and their programmed contents.

You can select a desired memory channel from the

memory channel list.

Menu group selection

Push [MENU/GRP] for 1 sec.

Selection from:

(Graphic)

Menu selection (Example: M)

Push [MENU/GRP] momentarily.

Selection from:

Either

Y or Z

Either

Y or Z

104

MEMORY OPERATION

Select memory channels are used for select memory

scan. Select memory scan repeatedly scans the se-

lect memory channels only. This is useful to speed up

the memory scan interval. Of course, select memory

channels are also scanned during normal memory

scan.

q Select the memory channel list as described at left.

w Push [PBT/M-ch/RIT] momentarily to select the M-

ch/RIT function, if the twin PBT is selected.

•[PBT/M-ch/RIT] indicator (Green) goes out.

e Rotate [M-ch] (inner) control to select the desired

memory channel.

•All memory channels including blank channels can be

selected.

•[

]/[

] on the microphone also changes the channels.

r Push [F-1

SSEELL

] to set the memory channel as a

select memory or not.

t Repeat steps e to r to program another memory

channel as a select memory channel, if desired.

y Push [

(

GRP

)] twice to exit the memory

channel list.

Setting select memory channels is also possible in

the memory scan indication. (p. 113)

“ß” appears for select memory channel.

Push [F-1 SEL]

[MENU/GRP] [F-1]

[PBT/M-ch/RIT] indicator

[PBT/M-ch/RIT] switch/[M-ch] (inner) control

D Setting a memory channel as a select memory

The IC-7000 has a total of 5 memory banks (99 mem-

ory channel each), A to E, available for usage by

group, etc.

q Select the memory channel as described at p. 100.

w Push [PBT/M-ch/RIT] momentarily to select the M-

ch/RIT function, if the twin PBT is selected.

•[PBT/M-ch/RIT] indicator (Green) goes out.

e Rotate [RIT] (outer) control to select the desired

memory bank.

• Memory channel list indication

q Select the memory channel list as described at left.

w Push [F-4

BBNNKK

] several times to select the desired

memory bank.

•Rotating [RIT] (outer) control also changes the bank.

e Push [

(

GRP

)] twice to exit the memory

channel list.

Push

Bank indication

BNK

[F-4]

[MENU/GRP]

[RIT] (outer) control

Bank indication

D Selecting a memory bank

105

MEMORY OPERATION

D Memory names

All memory channels (including scan edges) can be

tagged with alphanumeric names of up to 9 charac-

ters each.

Capital letters, small letters, numerals, some symbols

(! # $ % & ¥ ? " ’ ` ^ + – ✱ / . , : ; = < > ( ) [ ] { } | _

and spaces can be used.

•Editing (programming) memory names

q Select

w Push [F-4

VV//MM

] to select memory mode.

e Push [F-1] (

MMEEMM

LLSSTT

) twice to enter the memory

channel list.

r Push [PBT/M-ch/RIT] momentarily to select the M-

ch/RIT function, if the twin PBT is selected.

•[PBT/M-ch/RIT] indicator (Green) goes out.

t Rotate [M-ch] (inner) control to select the desired

memory channel.

•All memory channels including blank channels can be

selected.

•[

]/[

] on the microphone also changes the channels.

y Push [F-2

NNAAMM

] to edit memory channel name.

•Acursor appears and blinks.

•Memory channel names of blank channels cannot be

edited.

u Push [

(

GRP

)] several times to select the de-

sired character group.

•[ABC], [abc], [123] or [etc] indicates the capital letters,

small letters, numerals or symbols, respectively

i Input the desired character by rotating [DIAL].

•Push [F-1

ÅÅ

] or [F-2

ÇÇ

] for cursor movement.

•Push [F-3

DDEELL

] to delete the selected character.

•Push [F-4

SSPPCC

] to input a space.

•Pushing the HM-151’s keypad, [0]–[9], can also enter

numerals.

o Push [

(

GRP

)] to input and set the name.

•The cursor disappears.

!0 Repeat steps t to o to program another memory

channel’s name, if desired.

!1 Push [

(

GRP

)] twice to exit the memory

channel list.

Push

Rotate

NAM

Push

Selected character

[PBT/M-ch/RIT] indicator

[PBT/M-ch/RIT] switch/[M-ch] (inner) control

[DIAL][MENU/GRP]

[F-1]

[F-2] [F-3] [F-4]

Menu group selection

Push [MENU/GRP] for 1 sec.

Selection from:

(Graphic)

Menu selection (Example: M)

Push [MENU/GRP] momentarily.

Selection from:

Either

Y or Z

Either

Y or Z

106

MEMORY OPERATION

q Select

w Push [F-4

VV//MM

] to select memory mode.

e Push [F-1] (

MMEEMM

LLSSTT

) twice to enter the memory

channel list.

r Push [PBT/M-ch/RIT] momentarily to select the M-

ch/RIT function, if the twin PBT is selected.

•[PBT/M-ch/RIT] indicator (Green) goes out.

t Rotate [M-ch] to select the memory channel to be

cleared (blanked).

y Push and hold [F-3

MMCCLL

] for 1 sec. to clear the

contents.

u Push [

(

GRP

)] twice to exit the memory

channel list.

MCL

Push for

1 sec.

Programmed frequency

and operating mode

disappear.

[MENU/GRP]

[PBT/M-ch/RIT] indicator

[PBT/M-ch/RIT] switch/[M-ch] (inner) control

[F-1] [F-3] [F-4]

D Memory clearing using the memory channel list

Any unnecessary memory channels can be cleared.

The cleared memory channels become blank chan-

nels.

q Select

w Push [F-4

VV//MM

] momentarily to select the memory

mode.

e Push [PBT/M-ch/RIT] momentarily to select the M-

ch/RIT function, if the twin PBT is selected.

•[PBT/M-ch/RIT] indicator (Green) goes out.

r Rotate [M-ch] to select the memory channel to be

cleared.

t Push and hold [F-3

MMCCLL

] for 1 sec. to clear the

contents.

•The programmed frequency and operating mode dis-

appear and “”appears.

y To return to VFO mode, push [F-4

VV//MM

] again.

Push for

1 sec.

MCL

[MENU/GRP] [F-3]

[PBT/M-ch/RIT] indicator

[PBT/M-ch/RIT] switch/[M-ch] (inner) control

[F-4]

■ Memory clearing

107

MEMORY OPERATION

■ Frequency transferring

This is useful for transferring programmed contents to

VFO.

q Select

w Push [F-4

VV//MM

] momentarily to select the VFO

mode.

e Push [F-1

MMEEMM

] to display the memory channel

contents.

•Memory channel contents appear above the multi-func-

tion key indicator.

r Push [PBT/M-ch/RIT] momentarily to select the M-

ch/RIT function, if the twin PBT is selected.

•[PBT/M-ch/RIT] indicator (Green) goes out.

t Select a memory channel with [M-ch].

•“ ”appears if the selected memory channel is a

blank channel (and does not have contents). In this

case transferring is not possible.

y Push and hold [F-4

VV//MM

] for 1 sec. to transfer the

frequency and operating mode.

•Transferred frequency and operating mode appear in

the display.

[EXAMPLE]: Transferring contents of memory 16.

Operating frequency

Contents of memory 16

Push for

1 sec.

V/M

: 21.320 MHz/USB (VFO)

: 14.020 MHz/CW

[MENU/GRP] [F-1]

[PBT/M-ch/RIT] indicator

[PBT/M-ch/RIT] switch/[M-ch] (inner) control

[F-4]

D Transferring in VFO mode

The frequency and operating mode in a memory chan-

nel can be transferred to the VFO.

Frequency transferring can be performed in either VFO

mode or memory mode.

Menu group selection

Push [MENU/GRP] for 1 sec.

Selection from:

(Graphic)

Menu selection (Example: M)

Push [MENU/GRP] momentarily.

Selection from:

Either

Y or Z

Either

Y or Z

108

MEMORY OPERATION

This is useful for transferring frequency and operat-

ing mode while operating in memory mode.

When you have changed the frequency or operat-

ing mode in the selected memory channel.

• Displayed frequency and mode are transferred.

• Programmed frequency and mode in the memory

channel are not transferred, and they remain in

the memory channel.

q Push [PBT/M-ch/RIT] momentarily to select the M-

ch/RIT function, if the twin PBT is selected.

•[PBT/M-ch/RIT] indicator (Green) goes out.

w Select

e Push [F-4

VV//MM

] momentarily to select the memory

mode.

r Rotate [M-ch] to select the memory channel to be

transferred.

•“ ”appears if the selected memory channel is a

blank channel (and does not have contents). In this

case transferring is not possible.

t Push and hold [F-4

VV//MM

] for 1 sec. to transfer the

frequency and operating mode.

•Displayed frequency and operating mode are trans-

ferred to the VFO.

y Push [F-4

VV//MM

] momentarily to select the VFO

mode.

[MENU/GRP]

[PBT/M-ch/RIT] indicator

[PBT/M-ch/RIT] switch/[M-ch] (inner) control

[F-4]

D Transferring in memory mode

q Select

w Push [F-2

MMPPWW

] to program the frequency into a

memo pad.

When you write a 6th frequency and operating mode,

the oldest written frequency and operating mode are

automatically erased to make room for the new set-

tings.

NOTE:

Each memo pad must have its own unique

combination of frequency and operating mode;

memo pads having identical settings cannot be

written.

Displayed frequency and mode

MP5

MP4

MP3

MP2

MP1

The oldest written frequency

and mode are erased.

Newest

Oldest

Push

MPW

109

MEMORY OPERATION

■ Memo pads

The transceiver has a memo pad function to store fre-

quency and operating mode for easy write and recall.

The memo pads are separate from memory channels.

The default number of memo pads is 5, however, this

can be increased to 10 in the miscellaneous (others)

set mode if desired (p. 132).

Memo pads are convenient when you want to memo-

rize a frequency and operating mode temporarily, such

as when you ﬁnd a DX station in a pile-up or when a

station is busy for a long time and you want to tem-

porarily search for other stations.

Use the transceiver’s memo pads instead of relying on

hastily scribbled notes that are easily misplaced.

[MENU/GRP] [F-2] [F-3]

D Writing frequencies and operating modes into memo pads

Menu group selection

Push [MENU/GRP] for 1 sec.

Selection from:

(Graphic)

Menu selection (Example: S)

Push [MENU/GRP] momentarily.

Selection from:

Either

Y or Z

Either

Y or Z

110

MEMORY OPERATION

You can call up the desired frequency and operating

mode of a memo pad by pushing [F-3

MMPPRR

] in the

menu.

•Make sure

is selected in advance.

•Both VFO and memory modes can be used.

•The frequency and operating mode are called up, starting

from the most recently written.

When you call up a frequency and an operating mode

from memo pads with [F-3

MMPPRR

], the previously dis-

played frequency and operating mode are automati-

cally stored in a temporary pad. The frequency and

operating mode in the temporary pad can be recalled

by pushing [F-3

MMPPRR

] one or more times.

NOTE:

If you change the frequency or operating

mode called up from a memo pad, the frequency

and operating mode in the temporary pad are

erased.

MPR

MP5

MP4

MP3

MP2

MP1

VFO or memory mode

Push

MEMO PADS

D Calling up a frequency from a memo pad

111

SCAN OPERATION

•Channels

For programmed scan:Program scan edge frequen-

cies into scan edge memory channels 1A and 1B.

(p. 101)

For memory scan: Program two or more memory

channels except scan edge memory channels.

For memory select scan: Designate two or more mem-

ory channels as select memory channels—select a

memory channel, then push [F-2

SSEELL

] in the

menu (memory mode) to designate the channel as a

select memory channel.

For priority watch: Program one memory channel to be

watched.

•Scan resume ON/OFF

You can select the scan to resume or cancel when de-

tecting a signal, in the miscellaneous (others) set

mode, item “

SSCCAANN RReessuummee

.” Scan resume ON/OFF

must be set before operating a scan. See p. 132 for

ON/OFF setting and scan resume condition details.

•

Scan speed

Scan speed can be selected from 2 levels, high or low,

in the miscellaneous (others) set mode. See p. 132 for

details.

•Squelch condition

PROGRAMMED SCAN

Repeatedly scans between two scan edge frequencies

(scan edge memory channels 1A and 1B).

This scan operates in VFO mode.

SELECTED MEMORY SCAN

Repeatedly scans all selected memory channels.

PRIORITY WATCH

Checks for signals on a memory while operating on a

VFO frequency.

This scan operates in memory mode.This scan operates in memory mode.

This scan operates in VFO mode.

Scan

Scan edge 1A or 1B Scan edge 1B or 1A

Jump

Mch 1 Mch 5

Memory

channel

VFO

frequency

Mch 2 Mch 3 Mch 4

Mch 6Mch 7Mch 99

MEMORY SCAN

Repeatedly scans all programmed memory channels.

Mch 1 Mch 5

Mch 2 Mch 3 Mch 4

Mch 6Mch 7Mch 99

BLANKBLANK

ß (select)

ß (select) ß (select)

ß (select) ß (select) ß (select) ß (select)

ß (select) ß (select)

ß (select)

SCAN

STARTS

WITH

PROGRAMMED

SCAN

MEMORY SCANS

PRIORITY WATCH

SQUELCH

OPEN

The scan continues

until it is stopped man-

ually, and does not

pause even if it de-

tects signals.

This is not applicable

when the scan re-

sume is OFF and a

programmable step

(more than 1 kHz) is

selected.

Scan pauses on each

channel when the

scan resume is ON;

not applicable when

OFF.

SQUELCH

CLOSED

Scan stops when detecting a signal.

If you set scan resume ON in the miscella-

neous (others)l set mode, the scan pauses for

10 sec. when detecting a signal, then re-

sumes. When a signal disappears while scan

is paused, scan resumes 2 sec. later.

■ Scan types

■ Preparation

112

SCAN OPERATION

q Select

w Push [F-3

VV//MM

] to select VFO mode.

e Select the desired operating mode.

•The operating mode can also be changed while scan-

ning.

r Set [RF/SQL] open or closed.

•See page at left for squelch condition.

•If the [RF/SQL] control function is set as “AUTO,” the

squelch is always open in SSB, CW and RTTY modes.

See pgs. 1, 35, 129 for details.

t Push [F-1

SSCCNN

] to start the scan.

•Decimal point blinks while scanning.

y When the scan detects a signal, the scan turns

OFF, pauses or ignores it depending on the re-

sume setting and the squelch condition.

u To cancel the scan push [F-1

SSCCNN

NOTE:

If the same frequencies are programmed

into both scan edge memory channels 1A and 1B,

programmed scan does not start.

Select

VFO mode

then push [F-1 SCN]

[MENU/GRP] [F-1] [F-3]

[RF/SQL]

■ Programmed scan operation

q Select the desired memory bank, if necessary.

●

Push [PBT/M-ch/RIT] momentarily to select the

M-ch/RIT function, if the twin PBT is selected.

•[PBT/M-ch/RIT] indicator (Green) goes out.

●

Rotate [RIT] (outer) control to select the desired

memory bank.

w Select

e Push [F-3

VV//MM

] to select memory mode.

r Close the squelch with [RF/SQL].

t Push [F-1

SSCCNN

] to start the scan.

•Decimal point blinks while scanning.

y When the scan detects a signal, the scan stops or

pauses depending on the resume setting.

u To cancel the scan push [F-1

SSCCNN

NOTE:

Two or more memory channels must be

programmed for memory scan to start.

Select

memory mode

then push [F-1 SCN]

[MENU/GRP] [F-1] [F-3]

[RF/SQL]

[RIT] (outer) control

■ Memory scan operation

Menu group selection

Push [MENU/GRP] for 1 sec.

Selection from:

(Graphic)

Menu selection (Example: M)

Push [MENU/GRP] momentarily.

Selection from:

Either

Y or Z

Either

Y or Z

113

SCAN OPERATION

q Select VFO mode, then set a frequency.

w Close the squelch with [RF/SQL].

e Set the desired memory channel as the channel to

be watched.

r Select

t Push [F-2

PPRRII

] to start the priority watch.

•“ ” appears and decimal points blink while watching

VFO, and then “ ” and decimal points blink while

watching a memory channel.

y When the scan detects a signal, the scan pauses

for 10 sec. or until the signal disappears, depend-

ing on the resume setting.

u To cancel the scan push [F-2

PPRRII

NOTE:

The paused condition when detecting a sig-

nal differs depending on the scan resume condi-

tion. (p. 132)

resume on: pauses for 10 sec.

resume off: pauses until the signal disappears.

Select

VFO mode.

Select watching

channel.

Push [F-2 PRI].

[MENU/GRP] [F-2]

[RF/SQL]

Appears while scanning

q Select

w Push [F-3

VV//MM

] to select memory mode.

e Close the squelch with [RF/SQL].

r Push [F-1

SSCCNN

] to start the memory scan.

•Decimal point blinks while scanning.

t Push [F-2

SSEELL

] to change the memory scan to se-

lect memory scan.

y When the scan detects a signal, the scan stops or

pauses depending on the resume setting.

u To cancel the scan push [F-1

SSCCNN

NOTE:

Two or more memory channels must be

designated as select memory channels for select

memory scan to start (see p. 104).

While scan function is not active, pushing [F-2

SSEELL

] sets the select memory channels ON or OFF.

And pushing and holding [F-2

SSEELL

] for 2 sec.

clears the all select memory channels.

Designate

“★.”

Select

memory mode.

Push [F-1 SCN],

then push [F-2 SEL].

[MENU/GRP] [F-1] [F-2] [F-3]

[RF/SQL]

■ Select memory scan operation

■ Priority watch

Menu group selection

Push [MENU/GRP] for 1 sec.

Selection from:

(Graphic)

Menu selection (Example: M)

Push [MENU/GRP] momentarily.

Selection from:

Either

Y or Z

Either

Y or Z

114

ANTENNA TUNER OPERATION

The AT-180 automatic antenna tuner matches the IC-

7000 to the connected antenna automatically. Once the

tuner matches an antenna, the variable capacitor setting

are memorized as a preset point for each frequency

range (100 kHz steps). Therefore, when you change the

frequency range, the variable capacitors are automati-

cally preset to the memorized point.

NOTE:

•The AT-180 can match both HF and 50 MHz

bands. However, operation is different for the HF

and 50 MHz bands.

• When connecting the AT-180, the IC-7000’s output

power must be set over the 10 W. Otherwise, the

AT-180 may not be tuned correctly. (AT-180’s min-

imum operating input power is 8 W.)

[TUNER/CALL]

The AT-180 cannot be used for the 144/430 MHz

bands. When operating on the 144/430 MHz band,

pushing [TUNER/CALL] selects the call channel

(p. 100).

CAUTION: NEVER transmit with the tuner ON

when no antenna is connected. This will damage

both the transceiver and antenna tuner.

■ Optional AT-180

AUTOMATIC ANTENNA TUNER

operation

D Tuner operation

•For the HF band:

Push [TUNER/CALL] to turn the tuner ON. The an-

tenna is tuned automatically during transmission

when the antenna SWR is higher than 1.5:1.

•When the tuner is ON, “ ” indication appears.

•For the 50 MHz band:

Push and hold [TUNER/CALL] for 1 sec. to tune the

antenna. If “”indicator blinks slowly while trans-

mitting, push and hold [TUNER/CALL] for 1 sec.

again to re-tune the antenna.

D Manual tuning

During SSB operation on HF bands at low voice lev-

els, the AT-180 may not be tuned correctly. In such

cases, manual tuning is helpful.

Push [TUNER/CALL] for 2 sec. to start manual tun-

ing.

•CW mode is selected, a side tone is emitted, and “”

indicator blinks; then, the previous mode is selected.

If the tuner cannot reduce the SWR to less than 1.5:1

after 20 sec. of tuning, “”indicator disappears.

In this case, check the following:

•the antenna connection and feedline

•the antenna SWR (p. 36; meter function)

Through inhibit (HF bands only)

The AT-180 has a through inhibit condition. When se-

lecting this condition, the tuner can be used at poor

SWR’s. In this case, automatic tuning in the HF bands

activates only when exceeding SWR 3:1. Therefore,

manual tuning is necessary each time you change the

frequency. Although termed “through inhibit,” the tuner

will be set to the “through” conﬁguration if the SWR is

higher than 3:1 after tuning.

•Tuner sensitive condition (HF bands only)

If you require critical tuning at any time during trans-

mission, select the tuner sensitive condition. See

p. 131 for selection.

•Automatic tuner start (HF bands only)

If you want to turn OFF the tuner under conditions of

VSWR 1.5:1 or less, use “automatic tuner on” and

turn the tuner OFF. See p. 130 for turning the function

ON and OFF.

CONVENIENT

D AH-4 operation

115

ANTENNA TUNER OPERATION

Tuning is required for each frequency. Be sure to re-

tune the antenna before transmitting when you

change the frequency—even slightly.

q Set the desired frequency in an HF band.

•The AH-4 will not operate on frequencies outside of

ham bands.

w Push and hold [TUNER/CALL] for 1 sec.

•“ ” indicator and “CW” appears while tuning.

e “”indicator stays ON when tuning is com-

plete.

•When the connected wire cannot be tuned, “”in-

dicator blinks, and the AH-4 is bypassed and the an-

tenna wire is connected to the antenna connector on

the transceiver directly.

r To bypass the AH-4 manually, push [TUNER/

CALL].

•PTT tune function

The AH-4 is always tuned when the PTT is pushed

after the frequency is changed (more than 1%). This

function removes the “push and hold [TUNER/CALL]”

operation and activates ﬁrst transmission on the new

frequency. This function is turned ON in the miscella-

neous (others) set mode (p. 131).

CONVENIENT

■ Optional AH-4

AUTOMATIC ANTENNA TUNER

operation

The AH-4 matches the IC-7000 to a long wire antenna

more than 7 m/23 ft long (3.5 MHz and above).

•See p. 20 for connection.

•See the AH-4 instruction manual for AH-4 installation and

antenna connection details.

NEVER operate the AH-4 without an antenna wire.

The tuner and transceiver will be damaged.

NEVER operate the AH-4 when it is ungrounded.

Transmitting before tuning may damage the trans-

ceiver. Note that the AH-4 cannot tune when using a

⁄2 λ long wire or on a multiple of that frequency.

[TUNER/CALL]

RDANGER!: HIGH VOLTAGE!

NEVER touch the antenna element while tuning or

transmitting.

AH-4 setting example:

For mobile operation

For outdoor operation

Long wire

Optional AH-2b

antenna element

Menu group selection

Push [MENU/GRP] for 1 sec.

Selection from:

(Graphic)

Menu selection (Example: M)

Push [MENU/GRP] momentarily.

Selection from:

Either

Y or Z

Either

Y or Z

116

PACKET OPERATION

■ Packet operation

PPIINN ##//NNAAMMEE DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN

DDAATTAA IINN

Communication data input.

GGNNDD

Ground for DATA IN, DATA OUT and AF OUT.

Transmits when grounded.

PPTTTTPP

When grounded, microphone input (pin 6) of [MIC]

connector will be disconnected.

DDAATTAA OOUUTT

Outputs 9600 bps receive data.

AAFF OOUUTT

Outputs 1200 bps receive data.

SSQQLL

Squelch output.

Goes to ground when squelch opens.

Rear panel view

D Adjusting the data speed

q Select

w Push [F-4

99660000

] to select the 9600 baud mode

ON and OFF.

•“”appears when the 9600 baud mode is acti-

vated.

[MENU/GRP] [F-4]

D Adjusting the transmit signal output from the TNC

When setting data transmission speed to 9600 baud

bps, the data signal coming from the TNC is applied

exclusively to the internal limiter circuitry to automati-

cally maintain bandwidth.

NEVER apply data levels from the TNC of over 0.6

Vp-p, otherwise the transceiver will not be able to

maintain the band width and may possibly interfere

with other stations.

NOTE: Read the instructions supplied with your

TNC carefully before attempting packet operation

with the IC-7000.

1.When using a level meter or oscilloscope, adjust

the TX audio level (DATA IN level) from the TNC as

follows.

0.4 Vp-p (0.2 Vrms): recommended level

0.2–0.5 Vp-p (0.1–0.25 Vrms): acceptable level

2.When not using a measuring device.

q Connect the IC-7000 to a TNC.

w Enter a test mode (“CAL”, etc.) on the TNC, then

transmit some test data.

e When the transceiver fails to transmit test data or

transmits sporadically ([TX] indicator doesn’t light

red or blinks):

- Decrease the TNC output level until [TX] indica-

tor lights red continuously.

When transmission is not successful even though

[TX] indicator lights red continuously:

- Increase the TNC output level.

D Data socket

117

CLOCK AND TIMERS

This transceiver has a built-in 24-hour clock (acculacy

±75 sec. per month) with power-off timer function. The

clock indication is always displayed except after push-

ing [F-INP/ENT] (HM-151).

•Set mode operation

q Push [AF(

SET

)] momentarily to enter the set mode

menu.

w Push [F-3

TTIIMMEE

] to enter the time set mode.

e Push [F-1

≤≤

] or [F-2

≥≥

] to select the desired item.

r Rotate [DIAL] to set or select the desired value or

condition.

•Push [F-4

DDEEFF

] for 1 sec. to select a default value or

condition.

t Push [

(

GRP

)] twice to exit the set mode.

[DIAL][MENU/GRP]

[AF]

[F-1]

[F-2]

[F-3] [F-4]

■ Time set mode

CCLLOOCCKK22 OOffffsseett

This item sets the desired off-set time period for the

clock 2 indication within –24:00 to +24:00 in 5 min.

steps.

•Push [F-4

DDEEFF

] for 1 sec. to set the default value.

±± 00::0000

(default)

++ 99::0000

Rotate [DIAL] to set the

time.

TTiimmee ((NNooww))

This item sets the current time for the built-in 24-hour

clock.

1155::0000

Rotate [DIAL], then push [F-3

SSEETT

] to set the time.

CCLLOOCCKK22 FFuunnccttiioonn

This item turns the second clock indication ON and

OFF instead of 1st clock.

The clock 2 is convenient to indicate the UTC and

other country’s local time, etc.

•Push [F-4

DDEEFF

] for 1 sec. to set the default value.

OONN

The clock 2 is displayed in-

stead of the 1st clock indica-

tion.

OOFFFF

The clock 2 does not dis-

play. (default)

AAuuttoo PPoowweerr OOFFFF

This item sets the power-off period for automatic shut-

down after the power-on timer has turned power ON.

6600mmiinn

Push [F-3

SSEETT

] to enter the time.

YYeeaarr

This item sets the current year.

22000055

Rotate [DIAL], then push [F-3

SSEETT

] to set the year.

DDaattee

This item sets the current date.

33--1155((TTuuee))

Rotate [DIAL], then push [F-3

SSEETT

] to set the date.

118

CLOCK AND TIMERS

D Setting the current year

q Entering time set mode, push [F-1

≤≤

] to select

“

YYeeaarr

” item.

w Set the current year using [DIAL].

•“

PPuusshh [[SSEETT]]

” blinks.

e Push [F-3

SSEETT

] to enter the set year.

•Push [

(

GRP

)] to cancel the setting.

r Push [

(

GRP

)] twice to exit time set mode.

D Setting the current date

q Entering time set mode, push [F-1

≤≤

] or [F-2

≥≥

] to

select “

DDaattee

” item.

w Rotate [DIAL] to set the current date.

•“

PPuusshh [[SSEETT]]

” blinks.

e Push [F-3

SSEETT

] to enter the set date.

•Push [

(

GRP

)] to cancel the setting.

r Push [

(

GRP

)] twice to exit time set mode.

D Setting the current time

q Entering time set mode, push [F-1

≤≤

] or [F-2

≥≥

] to

select “

TTiimmee ((NNooww))

” item.

w Rotate [DIAL] to set the current time.

•“

PPuusshh [[SSEETT]]

” blinks.

e Push [F-3

SSEETT

] to enter the set time.

•Push [

(

GRP

)] to cancel the setting.

r Push [

(

GRP

)] twice to exit time set mode.

D Auto power OFF activity

119

CLOCK AND TIMERS

D Clock2 function activity

D Clock2 offset setting

q Entering time set mode, push [F-1

≤≤

] or [F-2

≥≥

] to

select “

CCLLOOCCKK22 FFuunnccttiioonn

” item.

w Select the CLOCK2 function activity using [DIAL].

e Push [

(

GRP

)] twice to exit time set mode.

q Entering time set mode, push [F-1

≤≤

] or [F-2

≥≥

] to

select “

CCLLOOCCKK22 OOffffsseett

” item.

w Rotate [DIAL] to set the offset time within –24:00

to +24:00 in 5 min. steps.

e Push [

(

GRP

)] twice to exit time set mode.

The transceiver can be set to automatically turn OFF

after a speciﬁed period is with beep when no opera-

tion is performed. The power-off period can be set to

30–120 min. in 30 min. steps.

q Entering time set mode, push [F-2

≥≥

] to select

“

AAuuttoo PPoowweerr OOFFFF

” item.

w Set the desired power-off time using [DIAL].

•“

PPuusshh [[SSEETT]]

” blinks.

e Push [F-3

SSEETT

] to enter the set time.

•Push [

(

GRP

)] to cancel the setting.

r Push [

(

GRP

)] twice to exit timer set mode.

120

SET MODE

Set mode is used for programming infrequently

changed values or conditions of functions. This trans-

ceiver has a quick set mode, display set mode, timer

set mode and miscellaneous (others) set mode.

•Set mode operation

q Push [AF(

SET

)] momentarily to enter the set mode

menu.

w Push [F-1

QQSS

], [F-2

DDIISSPP

], [F-3

TTIIMMEE

] or [F-4

OOTTHH

] to enter the desired set mode.

e Push [F-1

≤≤

] or [F-2

≥≥

] to select the desired item.

r Set the desired condition using [DIAL].

•Push [F-4

DDEEFF

] for 1 sec. to select a default condition

or value.

t Push [

(

GRP

)] twice to exit the set mode.

[DIAL][MENU/GRP]

[AF]

[F-1]

[F-2]

[F-3] [F-4]

• Quick set mode (p. 121)

• Start up screen

• Set mode menu

• Display set mode (p. 124)

• Time set mode (p. 117)

• Miscellaneous (others) set mode (p. 128)

Push

[AF]

momentarily

■ Set mode description

■ Quick set mode

RRFF PPoowweerr

(all modes)

This item adjusts the RF output power. The RF out-

put power can be adjusted from 0 to 100% in 1 %

steps.

100%

100% (default)

MMIICC GGaaiinn

(SSB/AM/FM modes)

This item adjusts microphone gain from 0 to 100% in

1% steps.

50%

50% (default)

121

SET MODE

Mode Set mode item Default setting

RRFF PPoowweerr

100%

MMIICC GGaaiinn

50%

SSSSBB TTBBWW ((WWIIDDEE)) LL

100 [Hz]

SSB 4

SSSSBB TTBBWW ((WWIIDDEE)) HH

2900 [Hz]

SSSSBB TTBBWW ((MMIIDD)) LL

300 [Hz]

SSSSBB TTBBWW ((MMIIDD)) HH

2700 [Hz]

SSSSBB TTBBWW ((NNAARR)) LL

500 [Hz]

SSSSBB TTBBWW ((NNAARR)) HH

2500 [Hz]

RRFF PPoowweerr

100%

KKeeyy SSppeeeedd

20WPM

CW 3

CCWW PPiittcchh

600 [Hz]

SSiiddee TToonnee LLeevveell

50%

SSiiddee TToonnee LLeevveell LLiimmiitt

RRFF PPoowweerr

100%

TTwwiinn PPeeaakk FFiilltteerr

OFF

RTTY 3

RRTTTTYY MMaarrkk FFrreeqquueennccyy

2125 [Hz]

RRTTTTYY SShhiifftt WWiiddtthh

170 [Hz]

RRTTTTYY KKeeyyiinngg PPoollaarriittyy

Normal

RRFF PPoowweerr

100%

FM/WFM

MMIICC GGaaiinn

50%

SSSSBB TTBBWW ((WWIIDDEE)) LL

(SSB mode)

These items set the transmission passband width for

the wide setting by selecting the lower and higher fre-

quencies.

Lower freq. : 100 (default), 200, 300 and 500 Hz

100

100 Hz (default)

122

SET MODE

SSSSBB TTBBWW ((WWIIDDEE)) HH

(SSB mode)

These items set the transmission passband width for

the wide setting by selecting the lower and higher fre-

quencies.

Higher freq.: 2500, 2700, 2800 and 2900 Hz (default)

2900

2900 Hz (default)

■

Quick set mode (continued)

SSSSBB TTBBWW ((MMIIDD)) LL

(SSB mode)

These items set the transmission passband width for

the middle setting by selecting the lower and higher

frequencies.

Lower freq. : 100, 200, 300 (default) and 500 Hz

300

300 Hz (default)

SSSSBB TTBBWW ((MMIIDD)) HH

(SSB mode)

These items set the transmission passband width for

the middle setting by selecting the lower and higher

frequencies.

Higher freq.: 2500, 2700 (default) 2800 and 2900 Hz

2700

2700 Hz (default)

SSSSBB TTBBWW ((NNAARR)) HH

(SSB mode)

These items set the transmission passband width for

the narrow setting by selecting the lower and higher

frequencies.

Lower freq. : 2500 (default), 2700, 2800 and 2900 Hz

2500

2500 Hz (default)

SSSSBB TTBBWW ((NNAARR)) LL

(SSB mode)

These items set the transmission passband width for

the narrow setting by selecting the lower and higher

frequencies.

Lower freq. : 100, 200, 300 and 500 Hz (default)

500

500 Hz (default)

CCWW PPiittcchh

(CW mode)

This item adjusts the CW receive pitch. The pitch can

be selected from 300 to 900 Hz in 5 Hz steps.

600

600 Hz (default)

KKeeyy SSppeeeedd

(CW mode)

This item adjusts the CW key speed. The key speed

can be selected from 6 to 60 wpm.

20WPM

20 WPM (default)

123

SET MODE

■

Quick set mode (continued)

TTwwiinn PPeeaakk FFiilltteerr

(RTTY mode)

This item turns the twin peak ﬁlter ON and OFF.

OONN

Twin peak ﬁlter is ON

OOFFFF

Twin peak ﬁlter is OFF.

(default)

RRTTTTYY MMaarrkk FFrreeqquueennccyy

(RTTY mode)

This item selects the RTTY mark frequency. RTTY

mark frequency is switched between 1275, 1615 and

2125 Hz.

22112255

2125 Hz RTTY mark

frequency (default)

11227755

1275 Hz RTTY mark

frequency

RRTTTTYY SShhiifftt WWiiddtthh

(RTTY mode)

This item adjusts the RTTY shift width. There are 3

selectable values: 170, 200 and 425 Hz.

117700

170 Hz RTTY shift

frequency (default)

442255

425 Hz RTTY shift

frequency

RRTTTTYY KKeeyyiinngg PPoollaarriittyy

(RTTY mode)

This item selects the RTTY keying polarity. Normal or

reverse keying polarity can be selected.

When reverse polarity is selected, Mark and Space

are reversed.

- Normal : Key open/close = Mark/Space

- Reverse : Key open/close = Space/Mark

NNoorrmmaall

Normal polarity

(default)

RReevveerrssee

Reverse polarity

SSiiddee TToonnee LLeevveell LLiimmiitt

(CW mode)

This item allows you to set a maximum volume level

for CW side tones. CW side tones are linked to the

[AF] control until a speciﬁed volume level is reached

—further rotation of the [AF] control will not increase

the volume of the CW side tones.

OONN

CW side tone level is limited

with [AF] (default)

OOFFFF

CW side tone level is linked

to [AF]

SSiiddee TToonnee LLeevveell

(CW mode)

This item adjusts the CW side tone level from 0% to

100% in 1% steps.

See p. 43 for details.

 50%

50% (default)

124

SET MODE

■ Display set mode

To adjust the LCD contrast or backlight, wait until

the LCD becomes stable (10 min. or more after turn-

ing power ON). This is an inherent characteristic of

LCDs and LCD backlights and does not indicate a

transceiver malfunction.

CCoonnttrraasstt ((LLCCDD))

This item adjusts the contrast of the LCD from 0% to

100% in 1% steps.

 40%

40% (default)

BBrriigghhtt ((LLCCDD))

This item adjusts the brightness of the LCD from 0%

to 100% in 1% steps.

 70%

70% (default)

LLCCDD UUnniitt BBrriigghhtt

This item adjusts the brightness of the LCD unit from

0% to 100% in 1% steps.

 40%

40% (default)

LLCCDD FFlliicckkeerr

This item adjusts the flicker of the LCD from 0% to

100% in 1% steps.

Icom recommends using the default value. But if

you ﬁnd the LCD ﬂicker objectionable, adjust this

item.

 65%

65% (default)

BBaacckklliigghhtt((SSwwiittcchheess))

This item adjusts the brightness of the switches from

0% to 100% in 1% steps.

 50%

50% (default)

DDiissppllaayy TTyyppee

This item sets the LCD screen type. There are 3 se-

lectable types: A (Black-background), B (White-back-

ground), and C (Blue-background).

A-type LCD screen (default)

125

SET MODE

DDiissppllaayy FFoonntt SSiizzee

This item sets the font size of the frequency readouts.

Normal and large (2 sizes) are selectable.

NNoorrmmaall

Normal size (default)

■

Display set mode (continued)

MMeetteerr PPeeaakk HHoolldd

This item turns the meter peak hold function ON and

OFF.

When the meter peak hold function is ON, the highest

activated segment of the meter remains visible for 0.5

sec.; when OFF, the meter functions normally.

OONN

Meter peak hold is ON

(default)

OOFFFF

Meter peak hold is OFF

FFiilltteerr PPooppuupp ((PPBBTT))

This item turns the popup indication ON and OFF for

the PBT function.

OONN

Popup function is ON

(default)

OOFFFF

Popup function is OFF

FFiilltteerr PPooppuupp ((FFIILL))

This item turns the popup indication ON and OFF for

the ﬁlter selection.

OONN

Popup function is ON

(default)

OOFFFF

Popup function is OFF

11HHzz MMooddee PPooppuupp

This item turns the popup indication ON and OFF for

the 1 Hz tuning step function.

OONN

Popup function is ON

(default)

OOFFFF

Popup function is OFF

SSccooppee CCEENNTTEERR//FFIIXX PPooppuupp

This item turns the popup indication ON and OFF for

the Scope center/ﬁx mode selection.

OONN

Popup function is ON

(default)

OOFFFF

Popup function is OFF

DDiissppllaayy FFoonntt TTyyppee

This item sets the font type of the frequency readouts.

Basic and Italic (2 fonts) are selectable.

BBaassiicc

Basic font (default)

126

SET MODE

■

Display set mode (continued)

TTVV PPooppuupp ((CCHH UUpp//DDoowwnn))

This item turns the popup indication ON and OFF for

the TV channel Up/Down operation.

TV operation is available for Japanese version only.

OONN

Popup function is ON

(default)

OOFFFF

Popup function is OFF

TTVV PPooppuupp ((PP..AAMMPP//AATTTT))

This item turns the popup indication ON and OFF for

the P.AMP/ATT setting on TV operation.

TV operation is available for Japanese version only.

OONN

Popup function is ON

(default)

OOFFFF

Popup function is OFF

VVooiiccee TTXX NNaammee DDiissppllaayy

This item turns the indication of the voice TX memory

channel names ON and OFF on the voice TX mem-

ory channels of the voice TX menu.

OONN

Voice TX memory names

are indicated on the voice

TX memory channels. (de-

fault)

OOFFFF

Only the voice TX memory

channels are indicated.

KKeeyyeerr MMeemmoorryy DDiissppllaayy

This item turns the indication of the keyer memory

contents ON and OFF on the keyer memory channels

of the memory keyer send menu.

OONN

Memory contents are indi-

cated on the keyer memory

channels. (default)

OOFFFF

Only the keyer memory

channels are indicated.

DDTTMMFF MMeemmoorryy DDiissppllaayy

This item turns the indication of the DTMF code se-

quence ON and OFF on the DTMF memory channels

of the DTMF send menu.

OONN

DTMF code sequence are

indicated on the DTMF

memory channels. (default)

OOFFFF

Only DTMF memory chan-

nels are indicated.

EExxtteerrnnaall DDiissppllaayy

This item selects the indication size for external dis-

play.

Same indication ratio as

transceiver display.

(default)

The indication width be-

comes narrow.

OOppeenniinngg MMeessssaaggee

This item turns the opening message screen indica-

tion capability ON and OFF.

OONN

Opening message is ON

(default)

OOFFFF

Opening message is OFF

127

SET MODE

■

Display set mode (continued)

PPoowweerr OONN CChheecckk

This item selects the indication ON or OFF when turn-

ing power ON.

ON : The Transceiver briefly displays ‘Your Call

sign,’ ‘RF power,’ ‘Auto power OFF timer’ and

‘RIT/∂TX frequency’ when turning power ON.

•No-programmed or disactivated items are skipped.

OFF : The display goes directly to frequency indica-

tion at power ON.

OONN

Power ON check is ON.

(default)

OOFFFF

Power ON check is OFF.

MMyy CCaallll

Your call sign, etc. can be displayed in the opening

screen when turning power ON. Up to 10 characters

can be programmed.

Capital letters, numerals, some symbols (– /

) and

space can be used.

q Push [AF(

SET

)] momentarily, then [F-2

DDIISSPP

] to

select the display set mode.

w Push [F-1

≤≤

] or [F-2

≥≥

] several times to select the

“

MMyy CCaallll

” item.

e Push [F-3

EEDDTT

] to edit.

•Acursor appears and blinks.

r Input the desired character by rotating [DIAL] or by

pushing the band key (on HM-151) for number

input.

•Push [

(

GRP

)] to select the capital letters

([ABC]), numerals ([123]) or symbols ([etc]).

•Push [F-1

ÅÅ

] or [F-2

ÇÇ

] for cursor movement.

•Push [F-3

DDEELL

] to delete the selected character.

•Push [F-4

SSPPCC

] to input a space.

t Push [

(

GRP

)] to input the set name.

•The cursor disappears.

y Push [

(

GRP

)] twice to exit the set mode

screen.

•Opening screen example

Selected

character

128

SET MODE

■ Miscellaneous (others) set mode

BBeeeepp((CCoonnffiirrmmaattiioonn))

A beep sounds each time a switch is pushed to con-

ﬁrm it. This function can be turned OFF for silent op-

eration.

The volume level can be set described below.

OONN

Conﬁrmation beep ON

(default)

OOFFFF

Conﬁrmation beep OFF

BBeeeepp((BBaanndd EEddggee))

A beep sounds when an operating frequency enters

or exits an amateur band. This functions independent

of the conﬁrmation beep setting (above).

The volume level can be set described below.

OONN

Band edge beep ON

(default)

OOFFFF

Band edge beep OFF

BBeeeepp LLeevveell

This item adjusts the volume level for (confirmation

and band edge) beep tones from 0% to 100% in 1%

steps. When beep tones are turned OFF, this setting

has no effect.

 50%

50% (default)

MMoonniittoorr

This item sets the TX monitor function ON and OFF.

The monitor gain can be set described below.

OONN

TX monitor function is

turned ON.

OOFFFF

TX monitor function is

turned OFF. (default)

MMoonniittoorr LLeevveell

This item adjusts the transmit IF signal monitor level

from 0% to 100% in 1% steps.

See p. 87 for details.

 50%

50% (default)

BBeeeepp LLeevveell LLiimmiitt

This item allows you to set a maximum volume level

for (confirmation and band edge) beep tones. The

beep tones are linked to the [AF] control until a spec-

iﬁed volume level is reached—further rotation of the

[AF] control will not increase the volume of the beep

tones.

OONN

Beep level is limited with

[AF] (default)

OOFFFF

Beep level is linked to [AF]

129

SET MODE

RRFF//SSQQLL CCoonnttrrooll

The [RF/SQL] control can be set as the RF/squelch

control (default), the squelch control only (RF gain is

ﬁxed at maximum) or ‘Auto’ (RF gain control in SSB,

CW and RTTY; squelch control in AM and FM).

See pgs. 1, 35 for details.

RRFF++SSQQLL

[RF/SQL] control as RF/squelch control

SSQQLL

[RF/SQL] control as squelch control

AAUUTTOO

[RF/SQL] control as RF gain control in SSB,

CW and RTTY; squelch control in AM and

FM (default)

■

Miscellaneous (others) set mode (continued)

QQuuiicckk SSPPLLIITT

When this item is set to ON, pushing and holding [F-1

SSPPLL

] (

) for 1 sec. sets the undisplayed VFO fre-

quency to the displayed VFO frequency plus the split

offset and activates split operation.

See p. 90 for details.

OONN

Quick split ON

(default)

OOFFFF

Quick split OFF

SSPPLLIITT LLOOCCKK

When this item is ON, [DIAL] can be used to adjust

the transmit frequency while pushing and holding

[XFC] even while the lock function is activated.

See p. 89 for split frequency operation details.

OONN

Split lock function ON

OOFFFF

Split lock function OFF

(default)

SSPPLLIITT OOffffsseett

This item sets the offset (difference between transmit

and receive frequencies) for the quick split function.

The offset frequency can be set from –9.999 MHz to

+9.999 MHz in 1 kHz steps.

00..000000MMHHzz

0.000 MHz offset

(default)

--99..999999MMHHzz

Minus 9.999 MHz offset

DDUUPP OOffffsseett 5500MM

This item sets the offset (difference between transmit

and receive frequencies) for duplex operation. How-

ever, this setting is used to input the repeater offset

for the 50 MHz band only.

The offset frequency can be set from 0.000 MHz to

+9.999 MHz in 1 kHz steps.

00..550000MMHHzz

0.5 MHz offset (default)

DDUUPP OOffffsseett HHFF

This item sets the offset (difference between transmit

and receive frequencies) for duplex operation. How-

ever, this setting is used to input the repeater offset

for an HF band only.

The offset frequency can be set from 0.000 MHz to

+9.999 MHz in 1 kHz steps.

00..110000MMHHzz

0.1 MHz offset (default)

130

SET MODE

■

Miscellaneous (others) set mode (continued)

OOnnee TToouucchh RReeppeeaatteerr

This item turns the one touch repeater function ON

(

DDUUPP--

DDUUPP++

) and OFF.

When [F-2

DDUUPP

] (M-3) is pushed and held for 1 sec.,

the selected offset direction and programmed duplex

offset frequency (depending on the operating fre-

quency band) is set with the displayed frequency.

DDUUPP--

Minus offset direction is se-

lected. (default)

OOFFFF

One touch repeater function

is OFF.

DDUUPP OOffffsseett 443300MM

This item sets the offset (difference between transmit

and receive frequencies) for duplex operation. How-

ever, this setting is used to input the repeater offset

for the 430 MHz band. only

The offset frequency can be set from 0.000 MHz to

+9.999 MHz in 1 kHz steps.

55..000000MMHHzz

5 MHz offset (default)

DDUUPP OOffffsseett 114444MM

This item sets the offset (difference between transmit

and receive frequencies) for duplex operation. How-

ever, this setting is used to input the repeater offset

for an 144 MHz band only.

The offset frequency can be set from 0.000 MHz to

+9.999 MHz in 1 kHz steps.

00..660000MMHHzz

0.6 MHz offset (default)

TTuunneerr ((AAuuttoo SSttaarrtt))

The optional AT-180

ANTENNA TUNER

has an automatic

start capability which starts tuning if the SWR is

higher than 1.5–3:1.

When “OFF” is selected, the tuner remains OFF even

when the SWR is poor (1.5–3:1). When “ON” is se-

lected, automatic tune starts even when the tuner is

turned OFF.

Even when “ON” is selected, automatic tune does

not start for the 50 MHz band.

OONN

Automatic tune function is

ON.

OOFFFF

Automatic tune function is

OFF. (default)

AAuuttoo RReeppeeaatteerr

This item turns the auto repeater function ON-1 (auto

duplex setting), ON-2 (auto duplex setting and acti-

vating tone encoder) or OFF.

See p. 65 for details concerning the auto repeater

function.

OONN--11

Auto duplex setting is ON.

(default)

OOFFFF

Auto repeater function is

OFF.

131

SET MODE

VVSSEENNDD SSeelleecctt

This item select the [ACC] (pin 7) output.

OONN

VSEND is for the 144/430 MHz;

HSEND is for the HF/50 MHz. (default)

UUHHFF OOnnllyy

VSEND is for the 430 MHz;

HSEND is for the HF/50/144 MHz.

OOFFFF

VSEND is not used;

HSEND is for all bands.

■

Miscellaneous (others) set mode (continued)

[[TTUUNNEERR]] SSwwiittcchh

When an optional AT-180

ANTENNA TUNER

is con-

nected, the transceiver retains the [TUNER/CALL]

key ON/OFF condition for each band, “Auto,” or all

band, “Manual.”

AAuuttoo

[TUNER/CALL] key ON/OFF condition is

retained for each band. (default)

MMaannuuaall

[TUNER/CALL] key ON/OFF condition is

retained for all band.

TTuunneerr ((PPTTTT SSttaarrtt))

When an optional AH-4

ANTENNA TUNER

is connected,

tuning can be started automatically at the moment the

PTT is pushed.

This function activates for HF band only.

OONN

Tuning starts when pushing

[PTT] on a new frequency.

OOFFFF

Tuning starts only when

[TUNER] is pushed. (default)

SSPPEEEECCHH LLaanngguuaaggee

This item selects language for the speech function.

You can select between English and Japanese as the

SPEECH language.

EEnngglliisshh

English announcement

(default)

JJaappaanneessee

Japanese announcement

SSPPEEEECCHH SSppeeeedd

This item selects the speech speed between faster or

slower synthesizer output.

HHIIGGHH

Faster announcement

(default)

LLOOWW

Slower announcement

SSPPEEEECCHH LLeevveell

This item adjusts the volume level for speech function

from 0% to 100% in 1% steps.

 50%

50% (default)

132

SET MODE

■

Miscellaneous (others) set mode (continued)

SSPPEEEECCHH SS--LLeevveell

You can have frequency, mode and signal level an-

nouncement. Signal level announcement can be de-

activated if desired.

When “OFF” is selected, the signal level is not an-

nounced.

OONN

Signal level announcement

(default)

OOFFFF

No signal level

announcement

SSPPEEEECCHH [[MMOODDEE]] SSwwiittcchh

This item selects the operating mode speech capabil-

ity when [MODE] is pushed.

When “ON” is selected, the selected operating mode

is announced at pushing [MODE].

OONN

Operating model announce-

ment with [MODE]

OOFFFF

No operating mode an-

nouncement with [MODE]

(default)

MMeemmooppaadd NNuummbbeerrss

This item sets the number of memo pad channels

available. 5 or 10 memo pads can be set.

5 memo pads

(default)

1100

10 memo pads

MMAAIINN DDIIAALL AAuuttoo TTSS

This item sets the auto tuning step function. When ro-

tating [DIAL] rapidly, the tuning step rate adapts as

selected.

There are 2 type of auto tuning steps: HIGH (Fastest)

and LOW (Faster).

HHIIGGHH

Auto tuning step is turned ON.

Fastest tuning step during rapid rotation

(default)

LLOOWW

Auto tuning step is turned ON.

Faster tuning step during rapid rotation

OOFFFF

Auto tuning step is turned OFF.

SSCCAANN SSppeeeedd

This item sets the rate at which channels or frequen-

cies are scanned during scan operations. High and

low can be selected.

HHIIGGHH

Scan is faster.

(default)

LLOOWW

Scan is slower.

SSCCAANN RReessuummee

This item sets the scan resume function ON and OFF.

OONN

Scan resumes 10 sec. after stopping on

a signal (or 2 sec. after a signal disap-

per). (default)

OOFFFF

Scan does not resume after stopping on

a signal. For the priority watch, setting to

OFF pauses the watch until the signal

disappears and scan resumes.

133

SET MODE

■

Miscellaneous (others) set mode (continued)

HHMM--115511 [[FF--11]]

This item programs one of several functions to [F-1]

key of HM-151. Programmable key assignments are

described as below.

MMPPWW

Memo pad write is pro-

grammed. (default)

AANNFF

Auto notch filter is pro-

grammed.

HHMM--115511 [[FF--22]]

This item programs one of several functions to [F-2]

key of HM-151. Programmable key assignments are

same as above.

MMPPRR

Memo pad read is pro-

grammed. (default)

NNBB

Noise blanker function is

programmed.

SSSSBB//CCWW SSyynncchhrroonnoouuss TTuunniinngg

This item selects the displayed frequency shift func-

tion from ON and OFF.

When this function is activated, the received signal

will remain the same even when the operating mode

is changed between SSB and CW.

The frequency shifting value may differ according

to the CW pitch setting.

OONN

The displayed frequency

shifts when the operating

mode is changed between

SSB and CW.

OOFFFF

The displayed frequency

does not shift.

(default)

MMIICC UUpp//DDoowwnn SSppeeeedd

This item sets the rate at which frequencies are

scanned when the microphone (HM-151) [

]/[

]

keys are pushed and held. High or low can be se-

lected.

HHIIGGHH

High speed (default,

5 tuning steps/sec.)

LLOOWW

Low speed

(2.5 tuning steps/sec.)

QQuuiicckk RRIITT//∂∂TTXX CClleeaarr

This item selects the RIT/∂TX frequency clearing in-

struction for the [F-3

CCLLRR

] key.

See pgs. 73, 86 for details.

OONN

Clears the RIT/∂TX fre-

quency when [F-3

CCLLRR

] is

pushed momentarily.

OOFFFF

Clears the RIT/∂TX fre-

quency when [F-3

CCLLRR

] is

pushed and held for 1 sec.

(default)

“P.AMP/ATT” (Preampliﬁer/attenuator),

“NB” (Noise blanker),

“NR” (Noise reduction),

“MNF” (Manual notch ﬁlter),

“ANF” (Auto notch ﬁlter),

“TS” (Tuning step),

“SPL” (Split operation),

“A/B” (VCO A/B selection),

“MCL” (Memory clear),

“BNK” (Bank selection),

“COM” (Speech compressor),

“AGC” (AGC selection),

“TBW” (TX ﬁlter width),

“DUP” (Duplexer),

“TON” (FM tone operation),

“MET” (Meter selection),

“VSC” (Voice squelch control),

“MPW” (Memo pad write),

“MPR” (Memo pad read),

“<SCOPE>” (Scope selection),

“<METER>” (Multi-meter selection)

134

SET MODE

■

Miscellaneous (others) set mode (continued)

CCWW NNoorrmmaall SSiiddee

Selects the carrier point of CW mode from LSB and

USB.

LLSSBB

The carrier point is set to

LSB side.

(default)

UUSSBB

The carrier point is set to

USB side.

KKEEYYEERR 11sstt MMeennuu

This item selects the initial menu when [F-2

KKEEYY

]

(

) is pushed, from “

KKEEYYEERR--SSEENNDD

” or

“

KKEEYYEERR--RRoooott

.”

KKEEYYEERR--SSEENNDD

Keyer send menu is se-

lected. (default)

KKEEYYEERR--RRoooott

Keyer root menu is selected.

DDTTMMFF 11sstt MMeennuu

This item selects the initial menu when [F-2

DDTTMM

]

(

) is pushed, from “

DDTTMMFF--SSEENNDD

” or “

DDTTMMFF--

RRoooott

.”

DDTTMMFF--SSEENNDD

DTMF send menu is se-

lected. (default)

DDTTMMFF--RRoooott

DTMF root menu is se-

lected.

VVOOIICCEE 11sstt MMeennuu

This item selects the initial menu when [F-1

VVOO

]

(

) is pushed, from “

VVOOIICCEE--RRXX//TTXX

” or

“

VVOOIICCEE--RRoooott

.”

VVOOIICCEE--RRXX//TTXX

Voice RX/TX menu is se-

lected. (default)

VVOOIICCEE--RRoooott

Voice root menu is selected.

MMooddee SSeelleecctt ((SSSSBB))

This item inhibits the selection of SSB (LSB/USB)

modes, and allows you to simplify operation during

normal operation.

For example if you are operating mobile and only plan

on using FM and AM modes, sets all other modes

(SSB, CW, RTTY, WFM) to OFF, thereby making se-

lection of AM or FM quick and easy.

OONN

SSB modes are selectable.

(default)

OOFFFF

SSB modes are inhibited.

MMooddee SSeelleecctt ((CCWW))

This item inhibits the selection of CW/CW-R modes,

and allows you to simplify operation during normal op-

eration.

OONN

CW modes are selectable.

(default)

OOFFFF

CW modes are inhibited.

MMooddee SSeelleecctt ((RRTTTTYY))

This item inhibits the selection of RTTY/RTTY-R

modes, and allows you to simplify operation during

normal operation.

OONN

RTTY modes are selectable.

(default)

OOFFFF

RTTY modes are inhibited.

EExxtteerrnnaall KKeeyyppaadd ((VVOOIICCEE))

This item sets the external keypad capability and

function.

For your information

The following diagram shows the equivalent circuit of

an external keypad and connects to the pin 2 and

pin 7 of the [MIC] connector (p. 10).

OONN

: Pushing one of external keypad switches, transmits

the desired voice memory contents (during a phone

mode (SSB, AM, FM) operation.

OOFFFF

: External keypad does not function.

(default)

If you want to transmit a message using the exter-

nal keypad descrived at left, you must set “47

FFrroonntt KKeeyyppaadd TTyyppee

” (p. 136) to “

EExxtt

KKeeyyppaadd

,” and record the desired message in

transmit voice memory channels T1—T4 in ad-

vance (p.96).

To [MIC] connector pin w

To [MIC] connector pin u

1.5kΩ

2.2kΩ

4.7kΩ

(T1/M1)

(T2/M2)

(T3/M3)

(T4/M4)

USER EXTERNAL KEYPAD

EExxtteerrnnaall KKeeyyppaadd ((KKEEYYEERR))

This item sets the external keypad capability and

function.

User external keypad is same as above.

OONN

: Pushing one of external keypad switches, transmits

the desired memory keyer contents during CW

mode operation.

OOFFFF

: External keypad does not function. (default)

If you want to transmit a memory keyer contents

using the external keypad descrived above, you

must set “47

FFrroonntt KKeeyyppaadd TTyyppee

” (p. 136)

to “

EExxtt KKeeyyppaadd

.”

135

SET MODE

■

Miscellaneous (others) set mode (continued)

MMooddee SSeelleecctt ((FFMM))

This item inhibits the selection of FM mode, and al-

lows you to simplify operation during normal opera-

tion.

OONN

FM mode is selectable.

(default)

OOFFFF

FM mode is inhibited.

MMooddee SSeelleecctt ((WWFFMM))

This item inhibits the selection of WFM mode, and al-

lows you to simplify operation during normal opera-

tion.

OONN

WFM mode is selectable.

(default)

OOFFFF

WFM mode is inihibited.

MMooddee SSeelleecctt ((AAMM))

This item inhibits the selection of AM mode, and al-

lows you to simplify operation during normal opera-

tion.

OONN

AM mode is selectable.

(default)

OOFFFF

AM mode is inhibited.

136

SET MODE

■

Miscellaneous (others) set mode (continued)

CCII--VV BBaauudd RRaattee

This item sets the data transfer rate. 300, 1200, 4800,

9600, 19200 bps and “Auto” are available.

When “Auto” is selected, the baud rate is automati-

cally set according to the connected controller or re-

mote controller.

AAuuttoo

Auto baud rate

(default)

1199220000

19200 bps

CCII--VV AAddddrreessss

To distinguish equipment, each CI-V transceiver has

its own Icom standard address in hexadecimal code.

The IC-7000’s address is 70h.

When 2 or more IC-7000’s are connected to an op-

tional CT-17

V LEVEL CONVERTER

, rotate [DIAL] to

select a different address for each IC-7000 in the

range 01h to 7Fh.

7700hh

Address of 70h

(default)

77FFhh

Address of 7Fh

CCII--VV TTrraannsscceeiivvee

Transceive operation is possible with the

IC-7000

con-

nected to other Icom HF transceivers or receivers.

When “ON” is selected, changing the frequency, op-

erating mode, etc. on the IC-7000 automatically

changes those of connected transceivers (or re-

ceivers) and vice versa.

OONN

Transceive ON

(default)

OOFFFF

Transceive OFF

RREEFF AAddjjuusstt

This item adjusts the internal reference frequency

within 0 to 100% range in 1 % steps.

FFrroonntt KKeeyyppaadd TTyyppee

This item selects the keypad type that connected to

the [MIC] connector.

DDoott//DDaasshh

Dot/Dash (default)

EExxtt KKeeyyppaadd

External keypad

137

MAINTENANCE

If the transceiver becomes dusty or dirty,

wipe it clean with a dry, soft cloth.

AVOID the use of strong chemical solvents

such as thinner, benzine or alcohol to clean

the transceiver. These may damage the

transceiver’s surfaces.

■ Fuse replacement

If a fuse blows or the transceiver stops functioning, try

to ﬁnd the source of the problem, and replace the dam-

aged fuse with a new, adequately rated fuse.

CAUTION:

Disconnect the DC power cable from

the transceiver when changing a fuse.

The IC-7000 has three fuses (DC power cable fuses×

2, circuitry fuse×1) installed for transceiver protection.

•DC power cable fuses ........................... ATC20 30 A

•Circuitry fuse ............................................ ATC20 5 A

CIRCUITRY FUSE REPLACEMENT

The 13.8 V DC from the DC power cable is applied to

all units in the IC-7000, except for the power ampli-

ﬁer, through the circuitry fuse. This fuse is installed in

the FRONT unit.

R WARNING: NEVER attempt to remove fuse

cover using your ﬁnger nails, this may result in in-

jury.

Fuse

Screw driver

Fuse cover

■ Memory backup

All of the CPU’s memory is backed up by an EEP-

ROM (Electronically-Erasable Programmable Read-

Only Memory). All data you set, such as VFO,

memory, set mode contents, etc. are stored in this

EEPROM. There is no internal lithium battery.

■ Cleaning

DC power cable fuse replacement

138

TROUBLESHOOTING

The following chart is designed to help you correct

problems which are not equipment malfunctions.

If you are unable to locate the cause of a problem or

solve it through the use of this chart, contact your near-

est Icom Dealer or Service Center.

PROBLEM

POWER SUPPLY

RECEIVE

POSSIBLE CAUSE SOLUTION REF.

Power does not come

on when [PWR] key is

pushed.

No sound comes from

the speaker.

Sensitivity is low.

Receive audio is distor-

ted.

Receive signal is distor-

ted by strong signals.

DC power cable is improperly

connected.

Fuse is blown.

Battery is exhausted if you are using

a 12 V battery as the power source.

Reconnect the power cable correctly.

Check for the cause, then replace the

fuse with a spare one.

(Fuses are installed in two places. One is

installed in the DC power cable and the

other is installed in the FRONT unit.

Check the battery voltage.

p. 19

p. 137

—

pgs. 1,

25, 33

pgs. 1,

25, 35

—

p. 18

—

pgs.

114, 115

p. 72

p. 34

p. 77

p. 78

p. 72

Volume level is set too low.

The squelch is closed.

The transceiver is in transmit mode.

An external speaker or headphones

are connected.

The antenna is not connected properly.

The antenna feed line is cut or shorted.

The antenna is not properly tuned.

The attenuator function is activated.

The operating mode is not selected

correctly.

The PBT function is activated.

Noise blanker function is activated.

Preamp is activated.

Rotate [AF] clockwise to obtain a suit-

able listening level.

Rotate [SQL] counterclockwise to

open the squelch.

Release [PTT] on the microphone or

check the SEND line of an external

unit, if connected.

Check the external speaker or head-

phone plug connection.

Reconnect to the antenna connector.

Check the feed line and correct any

improper conditions.

Push [TUNER/CALL] to manually

tune the antenna.

Push [P.AMP/ATT] to turn the

function OFF.

Select a suitable operating mode.

Push [PBT/M-ch/RIT(CLR)] for 1 sec.

to clear the PBT function.

Push

[NB/ADJ]

to turn the function

OFF.

Push [P.AMP/ATT] to turn the

function OFF.

139

TROUBLESHOOTING

PROBLEM

TRANSMITDISPLAYSCAN

POSSIBLE CAUSE SOLUTION REF.

Transmitting is impossi-

ble.

Output power is too low.

No contact possible with

other stations.

Repeater cannot be ac-

cessed.

Transmitted signals are

distorted.

Displayed frequency

does not change proper-

ly.

Programmed scan does

not stop.

Programmed scan does

not start.

Memory scan does not

start.

Memory select scan

does not start.

The operating frequency is not set to

a ham band.

Power is set to a lower power than

maximum.

Microphone gain is set too low.

The antenna is not connected properly.

The antenna feed line is cut or shorted.

The antenna is not properly tuned.

RIT function is activated.

Split function is activated.

Split function is not activated.

An incorrect transmit frequency is set.

Subaudible tone encoder is OFF and

repeater requires a tone for access.

Programmed subaudible tone fre-

quency is wrong.

Microphone gain is set too high.

The compression level is set too high

with the speech compressor ON.

The dial lock function is activated.

The internal CPU has malfunctioned.

Squelch is open.

The same frequencies have been

programmed in scan edge memory

channels.

2 or more memory channels have not

been programmed.

2 or more memory channels have not

been designated as select channels.

Set squelch to the threshold position.

Program different frequencies into

scan edge memory channels.

Program 2 or more memory chan-

nels.

Designate 2 or more memory chan-

nels as select channels for the scan.

Set MIC gain in quick set mode.

Set compression level to a suitable

position.

Push [SPCH/LOCK] to deactivate the

function.

Reset the CPU.

(While pushing [Y(BAND)] and [Z(BAND)],

push [PWR] to turn power ON.

Push [F-1 SPL] in the M

1 menu to turn

the function ON

Set the proper frequencies into VFO

A and B or into one of the memory

channels.

Use

[F-3 TON] in the M

menu to se-

lect FM-TONE.

Program the required frequency using

FM tone set mode.

Push [F-1 RIT] in the RIT/∂TX mode

to turn the function OFF.

Push [F-1 SPL] in the M

1 menu to turn

the function OFF.

Set the output power in quick set

mode.

Set microphone gain to a suitable

position using quick set mode.

Reconnect the antenna connector.

Check the feed line and correct any

improper conditions.

Push [TUNER/CALL] to manually

tune the antenna.

Set the frequency to a ham band.

p. 29

p. 38

—

pgs.

114, 115

p. 73

p. 89

pgs.

27, 29

p. 63

p. 64

p. 38

p. 88

p. 37

p. 25

p. 35

p. 101

p. 104

140

OPTION UNITS SETTING

■ MB-106

CARRYING HANDLE

The optional MB-106

CARRYING HANDLE

is convenient

when carrying the transceiver for DX’ peditions, ﬁeld

operation, etc.

q Attach the rubber feet with the supplied screws as

shown below.

w Attach the MB-106 to the left side of the transceiver

as shown below.

Carrying

handle

Rubber

feet

■ Band voltage modiﬁcation

If you want to connect an external unit which can be

controlled by the band voltage from [ACC] connec-

tor, the following modiﬁcation is necessary. The band

voltage appears on pin 5 of [ACC] connector after

modiﬁcation is completed.

Performing this modiﬁcation is the customer’s re-

sponsibility. Icom does not guarantee this modiﬁ-

cation’s result.

CAUTION: Disconnect the DC power cable

from the transceiver before any work on the trans-

ceiver.

• Band voltage generator circuit

The below circuit is just for reference.

The following band voltage table is for reference only.

Please adjust and conﬁrm against the actual operat-

ing condition.

Bridge these

solder pads

IC-7000’s top view with

top panel is opened

DDS unit

Cooling

fan

Front panel

1.9 MHz

Rotary

switch

Diode

VR 4.7 kΩ

4.7 kΩ

100 µH

4700 pF

BAND

8 V

Extenal

power souce

ACC socket of

an optional unit

GND

10 kΩ

22 kΩ

Open

3.5 MHz

7 MHz

10 MHz

14 MHz

18/21 MHz

24/28 MHz

BAND VOLTAGE

1.9 MHz —

3.5 MHz 6.1 V

7 MHz 5.1 V

10 MHz —

14 MHz 4.1 V

18/21 MHz 3.1 V

24/28 MHz 2.1 V

141

OPTION UNITS SETTING

■ AT-180 internal switch description

The optional AT-180 has 3 operating configurations

for HF band operation. Select a suitable conﬁguration

according to your antenna system.

q Remove the top cover of the AT-180.

w Set the tuner switches to the desired positions ac-

cording to the table below.

•AT-180 inside top cover

•Speciﬁcations for the AT-180

•Frequency coverage : 1.8–54 MHz

•Input impedance : 50 Ω

•Maximum input : 120 W

power

•Minimum tuning : 8 W

power

•Matching impedance : 16.7–150 Ω

(HF band)

range 20–125 Ω (50 MHz band)

•Tuning accuracy : Less than SWR 1.5:1

•Insertion loss : Less than 1.0 dB

(after tuning)

•Power supply : 13.8 V DC/1 A (supplied from

requirements the transceiver’s ACC socket)

•Dimensions (mm/in) : 167(W)×58.6(H)× 225(D)

⁄16(W)×2

⁄17(H)×8

⁄8(D)

•Weight : 2.4 kg; 5 lb 4 oz

•Supplied accessories: Coaxial cable (1 m),

ACC cable (DIN 13 pins)

•Connector information for ACC(2) socket

ACC 2

S2 S1

DC BA

PIN NO./

NAME

DESCRIPTION

q 8 V

Regulated 8 V output.

(10 mA max.)

w GND

Connects to ground.

e SEND

Input/output pin.

Goes to ground when transmitting (20 mA

max). When grounded, transmits.

r BAND

Band voltage output.

(Varies with amateur band; 0 to 8.0 V).

t ALC

ALC output voltage (–4 to 0 V).

y NC

No connection.

u 13.8V

13.8 V output when power is ON (1 A max).

SW Position

Operation

(default)

The tuner operating condition is set by S2

described below.

THROUGH INHIBIT

The tuner tunes the antenna even when the

antenna has poor SWR (up to VSWR 3:1

after tuning). In this case, manual tuning is

necessary each time you change the fre-

quency although the tuner automatically

starts tuning when the VSWR is higher than

3:1. This setting is called “through inhibit,”

however, the tuner is set to “through” if the

VSWR is higher than 3:1 after tuning.

TUNER SENSITIVE CONDITION

The tuner tunes each time you transmit (ex-

cept SSB mode). Therefore, the lowest

SWR is obtained at any given time.

For SSB mode, the same condition as the

“D” position.

(default)

NORMAL CONDITION

The tuner tunes when the SWR is higher

than 1.5:1. Therefore, the tuner activates

only when tuning is necessary.

142

CONTROL COMMAND

CONTROLLER TO IC-7000

FE FE 70 E0 Cn Sc Data area FD

Preamble code (fixed)

Transceiver’s default address

Controller’s default address

Command number

(see table below)

Sub command number

(see table below)

BCD code data for frequency

or memory number entry

End of message code (fixed)

OK MESSAGE TO CONTROLLER

FE FE 70 E0 FB FD

Preamble code (fixed)

Transceiver’s default address

Controller’s default address

OK code

(fixed)

End of message code (fixed)

NG MESSAGE TO CONTROLLER

FE FE 70 E0 FA FD

NG code

(fixed)

IC-7000 TO CONTROLLER

FE FE E0 70 Cn Sc Data area FD

D CI-V connection example

The transceiver can be connected through an optional

CT-17

V LEVEL CONVERTER

to a personal computer

equipped with an RS-232C port. The Icom Communi-

cation interface-V (CI-V) controls the following func-

tions of the transceiver.

Up to four Icom CI-V transceivers or receivers can be

connected to a personal computer equipped with an

RS-232C port. See p. 136 for setting the CI-V condi-

tion using the miscellaneous (others) set mode.

D Data format

The CI-V system can be operated using the following

data formats. Data formats differ according to com-

mand numbers. A data area is added for some com-

mands.

Personal

computer

mini-plug cable

IC-7000

9–15 V DC

■ Remote jack (CI-V) information

D C

ommand table

00 — Send frequency data

01 Same as Send mode data

command 06

02 — Read band edge frequencies

03 — Read operating frequency

04 — Read operating mode

05 — Set operating frequency

06 00 Select LSB

01 Select USB

02 Select AM

03 Select CW

04 Select RTTY

05 Select FM

07 Select CW-R

08 Select RTTY-R

07 — Select VFO mode

00 Select VFO A

01 Select VFO B

A0 Equalize VFO A and VFO B

07 B0 Exchange VFO A and VFO B

08 — Select memory mode

0001–0105* Select memory channel

*P1=0100, P2=0101

0106, 0107 Select the call channel

(C1=0106, C2=0107)

A0 Set the bank number

(1=A, 2=B, 3=C, 4=D, 5=E)

09 — Memory write

0A — Memory to VFO

0B — Memory clear

0C — Read offset frequency

0D — Set offset frequency

0E 00 Scan stop

01 Programmed/memory scan start

02 Programmed scan start

22 Memory scan start

23 Select memory scan start

Command Sub command Description Command Sub command Description

•Command table (continued)

0E B0 Set as non-select channel

B1 Set as select channel

D0 Set scan resume OFF

D3 Set scan resume ON

0F 00 Turn the split function OFF

01 Turn the split function ON

10 Select simplex operation

11 Select –DUP operation

12 Select +DUP operation

10 00 AM/FM/WFM modes:

Select 10 Hz tuning step

SSB/CW/RTTY modes: TS OFF

01 Select 100 Hz tuning step

02 Select 1 kHz tuning step

03 Select 5 kHz tuning step

04 Select 9 kHz tuning step

05 Select 10 kHz tuning step

06 Select 12.5 kHz tuning step

07 Select 20 kHz tuning step

08 Select 25 kHz tuning step

09 Select 100 kHz tuning step

10 AM/FM/WFM modes:

Select MHz step

SSB/CW/RTTY modes: Invalid

11 — Select/read attenuator (0=OFF,

12=ON (12 dB))

13 00 Announce with voice synthesizer

01 (00=all data; 01=frequency and

02 S-meter level; 02=receive mode)

14 01 + Level data [AF] level setting (0=max. CCW to

255=max. CW)

02 + Level data [RF] level setting (0=max. CCW to

255=11 o’clock)

03 + Level data [SQL] level setting (0=11 o’clock to

255=max. CW)

06 + Level data NR level setting (0=min. to

255=max.)

07 + Level data Inside [PBT] setting or IF shift

setting (0=max. CCW, 128=cen-

ter, 255=max. CW)

08 + Level data Outside [PBT] setting

(0=max. CCW, 128=center,

255=max. CW)

09 + Level data CW Pitch setting (0=300 Hz,

128=600 Hz, 255=900 Hz, in 5 Hz

steps)

0A + Level data RF Power setting (0=mini. to

255=max.)

0B + Level data MIC Gain setting (0=mini. to

255=max.)

0C + Level data Key Speed setting (0=slow to

255=fast)

0D + Level data NOTCH (NF1) frequency setting

(0=low freq. to 255=high freq.)

0E + Level data COMP Level setting (0=0 to

10=10)

0F + Level data Break-IN DELAY setting (20=2.0d

to 130=13.0d)

12 + Level data NB level setting (0=0 to

255=100%)

15 + Level data Monitor gain setting (0=0 to

255=100%)

16 + Level data VOX gain setting (0=0 to

255=100%)

14 17 + Level data Anti-VOX gain setting (0=0 to

255=100%)

18 + Level data Contrast (LCD) setting (0=0 to

255=100%)

19 + Level data Bright (LCD) setting (0=0 to

255=100%)

1A + Level data NOTCH (NF2) frequency setting

(0=low freq. to 255=high freq.)

15 01 Read squelch condition

02 Read S-meter level

11 Read RF power meter

12 Read SWR meter

13 Read ALC meter

14 Read COMP meter

16 02 Preamp (0=OFF; 1=ON)

12 AGC selection

(1=Fast; 2=Mid; 3=Slow)

22 Noise blanker (0=OFF; 1=ON)

40 Noise reduction (0=OFF; 1=ON)

41 Auto notch (0=OFF; 1=ON)

42 Repeater tone (0=OFF; 1=ON)

43 Tone squelch (0=OFF; 1=ON)

Speech compressor (0=OFF; 1=ON)

45 Monitor (0=OFF; 1=ON)

46 VOX function (0=OFF; 1=ON)

47 Break-in (0=OFF; 1=semi break-

in; 2=full break-in)

Manual notch (NF1) (0=OFF; 1=ON)

4B DTCS (0=OFF; 1=ON)

4C VSC (0=OFF; 1=ON)

4F Twin Peak Filter (0=OFF; 1=ON)

50 Dial lock function (0=OFF, 1=ON)

Manual notch (NF2) (0=OFF, 1=ON)

19 00 Read the transceiver ID

1A 00 Send/read memory contents (see

p. 146 for details)

01 Send/read band stacking register

contents (see p. 146 for details)

02 Send/read memory keyer contents

(see p. 146 for details)

03 Send/read the selected ﬁlter width

(SSB, CW, RTTY:

0=50 Hz to 40/31=3600/2700 Hz;

AM: 0=200 Hz to 49=10 kHz)

04 Send/read the selected AGC time

constant (0=OFF, 1=0.1/0.3 sec. to

13=6.0/8.0 sec.)

050001 RF Power setting (0=mini. to

255=max.)

050002 MIC Gain setting (0=mini. to

255=max.)

050003 Send/read of SSB TX bandwidth

(lower edge) for wide

(0=100, 1=200, 2=300, 3=500 HZ)

050004 Send/read of SSB TX bandwidth

(higher edge) for wide (0=2500,

1=2700, 2=2800, 3=2900 HZ)

050005 Send/read of SSB TX bandwidth

(lower edge) for middle

(0=100, 1=200, 2=300, 3=500 HZ)

050006 Send/read of SSB TX bandwidth

(higher edge) for middle (0=2500,

1=2700, 2=2800, 3=2900 HZ)

Command Sub command Description Command Sub command Description

143

CONTROL COMMAND

144

CONTROL COMMAND

CW: Clockwise, CCW: Counter Clockwise

•Command table (continued)

1A 050036 Send/read opening message

(0=OFF, 1=ON)

050037 Send/read my call sign setting (10

character: see p. 147 )

050038 Send/read power ON check

(0=OFF, 1=ON)

050039 Send/read current year (2000 to

2099)

050040 Send/read current date (0101 to

1231=Jan. 1st to Dec. 31st)

050041 Send/read current time (0000 to

2359=00:00 to 23:59)

050042 Send/read clock2 function (0=OFF,

1=ON)

050043 Send/read offset time for clock2

function (24001 to 24000=–24:00

to +24:00)

050044 Send/read auto power OFF period

(0=OFF, 1=30 min., 2=60 min.,

3=90 min.)

050045 Send/read TX monitor set

(0=OFF, 1=ON)

050046 Send/read TX monitor gain

(0=0% to 255=100%)

050047 Send/read conﬁrmation beep

(0=OFF, 1=ON)

050048 Send/read band edge beep

(0=OFF, 1=ON)

050049 Send/read beep gain (0=min. to

255=max.)

050050 Send/read beep gain limit (0=OFF,

1=ON)

050051 Send/read RF/SQL control set

(0=Auto, 1=SQL, 2=RF+SQL)

050052 Send/read quick split set (0=OFF,

1=ON)

050053 Send/read split offset –9.999 to

+9.999 MHz (see p. 147 for de-

tails)

050054 Send/read split lock set (0=OFF,

1=ON)

050055 Send/read duplex offset 0.000 to

9.999 MHz for HF (see p. 147 for

details)

050056 Send/read duplex offset 0.000 to

9.999 MHz for 50 MHz band (see

p. 147 for details)

050057 Send/read duplex offset 0.000 to

9.999 MHz for 144 MHz band

(see p. 147 for details)

050058 Send/read duplex offset 0.000 to

9.999 MHz for 430 MHz band

(see p. 147 for details)

050059 Send/read one touch repeater set

(0=DUP–, 1=DUP+)

050060 Send/read auto repeater set

(0=OFF, 1=ON-1, 2=ON-2)

050061 Send/read tuner auto start set

(0=OFF, 1=ON)

050062 Send/read PTT tune set (0=OFF,

1=ON)

1A 050007 Send/read of SSB TX bandwidth

(lower edge) for narrow

(0=100, 1=200, 2=300, 3=500 HZ)

050008 Send/read of SSB TX bandwidth

(higher edge) for narrow (0=2500,

1=2700, 2=2800, 3=2900 HZ)

050009 Twin Peak Filter (0=OFF; 1=ON)

050010 Send/read RTTY mark frequency

(0=1275 Hz, 1=1615 Hz,

2=2125 Hz)

050011 Send/read RTTY shift width

(0=170 Hz, 1=200 Hz, 2=425 Hz)

050012 Send/read RTTY keying polarity

(0=Normal, 1=Reverse)

050013 Send/read CW key speed (0=0.6

WPM to 255=60 WPM)

050014 Send/read CW Pitch setting

(0=300 Hz, 120=900 Hz, in 5 Hz

steps)

050015 Send/read CW side tone level

(0=min. to 255=max.)

050016 Send/read CW side tone level limit

(0=OFF, 1=ON)

050017 Send/read LCD contrast (0=0% to

255=100%)

050018 Send/read LCD bright (0=0%,

255=100%)

050019 Send/read LCD unit bright (0=0%

to 255=100%)

050020 Send/read LCD ﬂicker level (0=0%

to 255=100%)

050021 Send/read switch backlight (0=0%

to 255=100%)

050022 Send/read display type (0=A, 1=B,

2=C)

050023 Send/read display font type

(0=Basic, 1=Italic)

050024 Send/read display font size

(0=Normal, 1=Large)

050025 Send/read meter peak hold

(0=OFF, 1=ON)

050026 Send/read filter pop up indication

for PBT shifting (0=OFF, 1=ON)

050027 Send/read filter pop up indication

for IF ﬁlter setting (0=OFF, 1=ON)

050028 Send/read pop up indication for 1

Hz mode (0=OFF, 1=ON)

050029 Send/read pop up indication for

scope center/ﬁx (0=OFF, 1=ON)

050030 Send/read TV pop up indication for

channel Up/Down (0=OFF, 1=ON)

050031 Send/read TV pop up indication for

P.AMP/ATT (0=OFF, 1=ON)

050032 Send/read indication of the voice

TX memory channel names

(0=OFF, 1=ON)

050033 Send/read indication of the keyer

memory names (0=OFF, 1=ON)

050034 Send/read indication of the DTMF

memory names (0=OFF, 1=ON)

050035 Send/read external display setting

(0=1:1.8, 1=1:1.6)

Command Sub command Description Command Sub command Description

145

CONTROL COMMAND

•Command table (continued)

1A 050087 Send/read FM mode selectability

(0=OFF: inhibition, 1=ON: selec-

table)

050088 Send/read WFM mode selectabil-

ity (0=OFF: inhibition, 1=ON: se-

lectable)

050089 Send/read external keypad set

for voice memory (0=OFF, 1=ON)

050090 Send/read external keypad set

for keyer memory (0=OFF, 1=ON)

050091 Send/read external keypad type

connected to [MIC] connector of

controller (0=Dot/Dash type,

1=Ext Keypad)

050092 Send/read CI-V transceive set

(0=OFF, 1=ON)

050093 Send/read reference frequency

set (0=0 to 255=100%)

050094 Send/read speech compresser

level (0=0 to 10=10)

050095 Send/read auto voice monitor set

(0=OFF, 1=ON)

050096 Send/read MIC memo function

(0=OFF, 1=ON)

050097 Send/read contest number style

(0=Normal, 1=190→ANO,

2=190→ANT, 3=90→NO,

4=90→NT)

050098 Send/read count up trigger chan-

nel (1=M1, 2=M2, 3=M3, 4=M4)

050099 Send/read present number

(1–9999)

050100 Send/read CW keyer repeat time

(1=1 sec. to 60=60 sec.)

050101 Send/read CW keyer dot/dash

ratio (28=1:1:2.8 to 45=1:1:4.5)

050102 Send/read rise time (0=2 msec.,

1=4 msec., 2=6 msec.,

3=8 msec.)

050103 Send/read CW paddle polarity

(0=Normal, 1=Reverse)

050104 Send/read CW keyer type

(0=Straight, 1=Bug-key, 2=ELEC-

Key)

050105 Send/read MIC up/down keyer

(HM-103) set (0=OFF, 1=ON)

050106 Send/read RTTY decode USOS

(0=OFF, 1=ON)

050107 Send/read RTTY decode new line

code (0=CR,LF,CR+LF, 1=CR+LF)

050108 Send/read scope max. hold

(0=OFF, 1=ON)

050109 Send/read scope size set (0=Nor-

mal, 1=Wide)

050110 Send/read fast sweep set

(0=1 sweep, 1=Continuous)

050111 Send/read fast sweep audio level

(0=0 dB, 1=–10 dB, 2=OFF)

050112 Send/read NB level set

(0=min. to 255=max.)

050113 Send/read NB width set

(0=min. to 255=max.)

1A 050063 Send/read [TUNER/CALL] key ac-

tion set (0=Manual, 1=Auto)

050064 Send/read [ACC] (pin 7) output

“VSEND” set (0=OFF, 1=UHF

only, 2=ON)

050065 Send/read speech level (0=0 to

255=100%)

050066 Send/read speech language

(0=English, 1=Japanese)

050067 Send/read speech speed (0=Slow,

1=Fast)

050068 Send/read S-level speech

(0=OFF, 1=ON)

050069 Send/read speech capability with

[MODE] key operation

(0=OFF, 1=ON)

050070 Send/read memopad numbers

(0=5 ch, 1=10 ch)

050071 Send/read scan speed

(0=Low, 1=High)

050072 Send/read scan resume

(0=OFF, 1=ON)

050073 Send/read main dial auto TS

(0=OFF, 1=Low, 2=High)

050074 Send/read [F-1] key assigment of

the HM-151. (0=“P.AMP/ATT,”

1=“NB,” 2=“NR,” 3=“MNF,”

4=“ANF,” 5=“TS,” 6=“SPL,”

7=“A/B,” 8=“MCL,” 9=“BNK,”

10=“COM,” 11=“AGC,” 12=“TBW,”

13=“DUP,” 14=“TON,” 15=“MET,”

16=“VSC,” 17=“MPW,” 18=“MPR,”

19=“<SCOPE>,” 20=“<METER>”)

050075 Send/read [F-2] key assigment of

the HM-151. (Selectable functions

are same as [F-1].)

050076 Send/read mic. up/down speed

(0=Low, 1=High)

050077 Send/read quick RIT/∂TX clear

function (0=OFF, 1=ON)

050078 Send/read SSB/CW synchronous

tuning function (0=OFF, 1=ON)

050079 Send/read CW normal side set

(0=LSB, 1=USB)

050080 Send/read voice recorder 1st

menu set (0=Voice-root, 1=Voice-

RX/TX)

050081 Send/read keyer 1st menu set

(0=Keyer-root, 1=Keyer-send)

050082 Send/read DTMF 1st menu set

(0=DTMF-root, 1=DTMF-send)

050083 Send/read SSB mode selectability

(0=OFF: inhibition, 1=ON: selec-

table)

050084 Send/read CW mode selectability

(0=OFF: inhibition, 1=ON: selec-

table)

050085 Send/read RTTY mode selectabil-

ity. (0=OFF: inhibition, 1=ON: se-

lectable)

050086 Send/read AM mode selectability

(0=OFF: inhibition, 1=ON: selec-

table)

Command Sub command Description Command Sub command Description

146

CONTROL COMMAND

•Command table (continued)

To send/read memory contents

When sending or reading memory contents, an additional

code as follows must be added to specify the memory chan-

nel.

➥ Additional code: 0000–0102

(0100=P1, 0101=P2, 0102=Call)

Band stacking register

To send or read the desired band stacking register’s con-

tents, a combination of the frequency band and register

codes as follows are used.

For example, when sending/reading the oldest contents in

the 21 MHz band, the code “0703” is used.

•Frequency band codes

•Register codes

Codes for memory keyer contents

To send or read the desired memory keyer contents, the

channel and character codes as follows are used.

• Channel codes

• Character codes

1A 050114 Send/read NR level set

(0=0 to 15=15)

050115 Send/read VOX gain (0=0% to

255=100%)

050116 Send/read anti VOX gain (0=0% to

255=100%)

050117 Send/read VOX delay (0=0.0 sec.

to 20=2.0 sec.)

050118 Send/read DTMF speed set

(0=100 msec., 1=200 msec.,

2=300 msec., 3=500 msec.)

050119 Send/read Break-IN delay set

(20=2.0d to 130=13.0d)

06 Send/read SSB transmit band-

width (0=WIDE, 1=MID, 2=NAR)

07 Send/read DSP ﬁlter shape

(0= sharp, 1= soft)

08 Send/read manual notch ﬁlter1

bandwidth

(0=WIDE, 1=MID, 2=NAR)

09 Send/read manual notch ﬁlter2

bandwidth

(0=WIDE, 1=MID, 2=NAR)

0A Send/read 9600 bps mode set

(0=OFF, 1=ON)

1B 00 Set/read repeater tone frequency

(see p. 147 for details)

01 Set/read TSQL tone frequency

(see p. 147 for details)

02 Set/read DTCS code and polarity

(see p. 147 for details)

1C 00 Set/read the transceiver’s condi-

tion (0=Rx; 1=Tx)

01 Set/read antenna tuner condition

(0=OFF, 1=ON, 2=Start tuning or

while tuning)

Command Sub command Description

Code Frequency band Frequency range (unit: MHz)

01 1.8 1.800000– 1.999999

02 3.5 3.400000– 4.099999

03 7 6.900000– 7.499999

04 10 9.900000–10.499999

05 14 13.900000–14.499999

06 18 17.900000–18.499999

07 21 20.900000–21.499999

08 24 24.400000–25.099999

09 28 28.000000–29.999999

10 50 50.000000–54.000000

11 144 144.000000–148.000000

12 430 430.000000–450.000000

13 GENE Other than above

Code Register number

01 1 (latest)

02 2

03 3 (oldest)

Code Channel number

01 M1

02 M2

03 M3

04 M4

CW: Clockwise, CCW: Counter Clockwise

Character ASCII code Description

0–9 30–39 Numerals

A–Z 41–5A Alphabetical characters

space 20 Word space

/2FSymbol

?3FSymbol

,2CSymbol

.2ESymbol

^5Ee.g., to send

, enter ^4254

✱ 2A Inserts contact number (can be

used for 1 channel only)

147

CONTROL COMMAND

Character codes for My Call

Codes for memory name contents

To send or read the desired memory name settings, the char-

acter codes, instruction codes for memory keyer contents as

above, and the following are used.

• Character codes— Alphabetical characters

• Character codes— Symbols

Split/Duplex frequency setting

The following data sequence is used when sending/reading

the split or duplex frequency setting.

Repeater tone/tone squelch frequency

setting

The following data sequence is used when sending/reading

the DTCS code and polarity setting.

DTCS code and polarity setting

The following data sequence is used when sending/reading

the DTCS code and polarity setting.

Fixed digit: 0

1st digit: 0–7

2nd digit: 0–7

3rd digit: 0–7

Transmit polarity:

0= Normal

1= Reverse

Receive polarity:

0= Normal

1= Reverse

XX0XX

100Hz digit: 0–2

10 Hz digit: 0–9

1 Hz digit: 0–9

0.1 Hz digit: 0–9

Fixed digit: 0*

00XXX

*Not necessary when setting a frequency.

1 kHz digit: 0—9

100 Hz digit: 0 (fixed)

100 kHz digit: 0—9

10 kHz digit: 0—9

10 MHz digit: 0 (fixed)

1 MHz digit: 0—4

Direction:

00=+ direction

01=— direction

0XXXXXX

*No need to enter for duplex frequency setting.

Character ASCII code Character ASCII code

a–z 61–7A — —

Character ASCII code Character ASCII code

!21#23

$24%25

&26¥5C

?3F”22

’27`60

+2B–2D

:3A;3B

=3D<3C

>3E( 28

)29[5B

]5D{7B

}7D|7C

_5F

–

@40

Character ASCII code Description

0–9 30–39 Numerals

A–Z 41–5A Alphabetical characters

space 20 Word space

–2DSymbol

.2ESymbol

/2FSymbol

148

SPECIFICATIONS

■ General

•Frequency coverage :

Receive

30 kHz–199.999999 MHz*

400–470.000000 MHz*

Transmit

1.800–1.999999 MHz*

, 3.500–3.999999 MHz*

5.33050*

, 5.34650*

, 5.36650*

5.37150*

, 5.40350*

7.000–7.300 MHz*

, 10.100–10.150 MHz*

14.000–14.350 MHz*

, 18.068–18.168 MHz*

21.000–21.450 MHz*

, 24.890–24.990 MHz*

28.000–29.700 MHz*

, 50.000–54.000 MHz*

144.000–148.000 MHz*

, 430.000–450.000 MHz*

Some frequency bands are not guaranteed.

Depending on version. *

USA version only.

•Mode : SSB, CW, RTTY, AM, FM, WFM

(WFM is for receive only)

•

Number of memory CH

: 503 (split memory: 99×5 banks; scan

edges: 6; call channel: 2 ) channels

•Antenna connector : SO-239

×2 (for HF/50 MHz and

144/430 MHz)/50 Ω

•Usable temperature : –10°C to +60°C (+14°F to +140°F)

range

•Frequency stability : Less than ±0.5 ppm

(0°C to +50°C; +32°F to +122°F)

•Power supply : 13.8 V DC±15% (negative ground)

requirement

•Current drain : Transmit (at 100 W) 22 A

(at 13.8 V DC)

Receive squelched 1.3 A

max. audio 1.6 A

•Dimensions : 167(W)

×58(H)× 180(D) mm,

(projections not included)

⁄

16(W)

×2

⁄

32(H)

×7

⁄

32(D) in

•Weight (approx.) : 2.3 kg (5 lb 1 oz)

•CI-V connector : 2-conductor 3.5 (d) mm (

⁄8˝)

•Video connector : 2-conductor 3.5 (d) mm (

⁄

8˝)

•ACC connector : 13-pin

•Data connector : 6-pin

■ Transmitter

•Output power :

SSB, CW, FM, RTTY 2–100 W

(1.8–50 MHz bands)

2–50 W (144 MHz band)

2–35 W (430 MHz band)

AM 1–40 W (1.8–50 MHz bands)

2–20 W (144 MHz band)

2–14 W (430 MHz band)

•Modulation system :

SSB Digital PSN modulation

AM Digital low power modulation

FM Digital phase modulation

•Spurious emissions : Less than –60 dB*

*spurious freq.: below 30 MHz –50 dB, above 50 MHz –60 dB

•Carrier suppression : More than 50 dB

•Unwanted sideband : More than 50 dB

•Microphone : 8-pin modular jack (600 Ω)

connector

•KEY connector : 3-conductor 6.35 (d) mm (

⁄4˝)

•RTTY connector : 3-conductor 3.5 (d) mm (

⁄8˝)

■ Receiver

•Receive system :

SSB/CW/RTTY/AM/FM

Triple-conversion superheterodyne

WFM Double-conversion superheterodyne

•Intermediate frequencies:

1st

SSB/CW/RTTY/AM/FM 124.487 MHz

WFM 134.732 MHz

2nd

SSB/CW/RTTY/AM/FM 455 kHz

WFM 10.700 MHz

3rd

SSB/CW/RTTY/AM/FM 16.15 kHz

•Sensitivity (

at preamp ON):

•Squelch sensitivity

(threshold; preamp ON) :

SSB Less than 5.6 µV

FM Less than 0.3 µV

•Selectivity :

SSB*

(BW=2.4 kHz) More than 2.4 kHz/–6 dB

Less than 3.6 kHz/–60 dB

CW*

(BW=500 Hz) More than 500 Hz/–6 dB

Less than 900 Hz/–60 dB

RTTY

(BW=350 Hz) More than 360 Hz/–6 dB

Less than 650 Hz/–60 dB

(BW=6 kHz) More than 6.0 kHz/–6 dB

Less than 15.0 kHz/–60 dB

(BW=15 kHz) More than 12.0 kHz/–6 dB

Less than 20.0 kHz/–60 dB

*IF ﬁlter shape is set to SHARP.

•Spurious and image rejection ratio:

HF bands More than 70 dB

50 MHz band More than 70 dB

(except IF/2 through)

144/430 MHz band More than 65 dB (except IF through)

•Audio output power : More than 2.0 W

at 10% distortion

with an 8 Ω load (at 13.8 V DC)

•RIT variable range : ±9.99 kHz

•PHONES connector : 3-conductor 3.5 (d) mm (

⁄

8˝)/8 Ω

•EXT SP connector : 2-conductor 3.5 (d) mm (

⁄8˝)/8 Ω

Frequency

range

[MHz]

SSB/CW/

RTTY

10 dB S/N

12 dB SINAD

WFM

12 dB SINAD

0.5–1.8 — 13 µV — —

1.8–28

0.15 µV 2.0 µV

— —

28–29.995

0.5 µV —

50 MHz band 0.12 µV 1.0 µV 0.25 µV —

76–108 — — — 10.0 µV

144/430 MHz

bands

0.11 µV 1.0 µV 0.18 µV

—

MB-105 MOUNTING BRACKET

Metal plate for attaching the front panel to a

wall or other such ﬂat surface.

149

OPTIONS

AT-180 HF/50 MHz AUTOMATIC

ANTENNA TUNER

Fully automatic antenna tuner with preset

memories for each 100 kHz. Unique “auto-

matic tuner on” function is available. See

p. 141 for AT-180 speciﬁcations.

AH-4 HF AUTOMATIC ANTENNA

TUNER

Specially designed to tune a long wire an-

tenna for portable or mobile HF/50 MHz op-

eration. The “PTT tune” function provides

simple operation.

•Input power rating: 150 W

HM-151 HAND MICROPHONE

Standard hand microphone.

AH-2b ANTENNA ELEMENT

A 2.5 m long antenna ele-

ment for mobile operation

with the AH-4.

•Frequency coverage

7–54 MHz band with the

AH-4

SM-20 DESKTOP MICROPHONE

Includes [UP]/[DOWN] switches and a low

cut function. The OPC-589 is necessary to

use this microphone.

SP-7 EXTERNAL SPEAKER

Compact speaker for base station opera-

tion. Height can be adjusted for your conve-

nience.

•Input impedance:8 Ω

•Max. input power:5 W

CT-17 CI-V LEVEL CONVERTER

UNIT

For remote transceiver control using a per-

sonal computer equipped with an RS-232C

port. You can change frequencies, operat-

ing mode, memory channels, etc., via your

computer.

SP-10 EXTERNAL SPEAKER

External speakers suitable for mobile oper-

ation.

SP-12:Slim-type; 8 Ω/5 W

SP-10:Compact-type; 4 Ω/5 W

MB-62

MOBILE MOUNTING BRACKET

Mounts the transceiver main body, with or

without the front panel, inside a vehicle.

MB-65 MOUNTING BASE

Allows you to conveniently vehicle-mount

the front panel of the IC-7000. An MB-105

must be used in combination with the MB-

65.

MB-106 CARRYING HANDLE

Convenient when carrying the transceiver.

150

OPTIONS

OPC-598 ACC 13-PIN CABLE

Required when using the AT-180.

•7 m (22 ft)

OPC-1443 SEPARATION CABLE

OPC-1444 SEPARATION CABLE

(0PC-1443) (OPC-1444

Provide front panel detached operation for mobile installations or compact transceiver oper-

ation.

•OPC-1443: 3.5 m (11.5 ft)

•OPC-1444: 5 m (16.4 ft)

OPC-589

MICROPHONE ADAPTOR CABLE

Conversion between 8-pin modular and 8-

pin metal connector for using a desktop mi-

crophone with the IC-7000.

OPC-599 ADAPTOR CABLE

13-pin, ACC connector to 7-pin + 8-pin ACC

connector.

IC-PW1/EURO HF/50 MHz ALL BAND 1 kW LINEAR AMPLIFIER

Full-duty 1 kW linear ampliﬁer including an automatic antenna tuner. Has automatic tuning

and band selection capability. Full break-in (QSK) operation is possible. The ampliﬁer/power

supply unit and the remote control unit are separated. An optional OPC-599 is required for

connection.

OPC-742 ACC 13-PIN CABLE

Required when using both the AT-180

and 2 m linear ampliﬁer.

151

MENU GUIDE

Main menu group

Sub menu group

Graphic menu group

SPL A/B FIL

MEM MW MCL

XFC

V/M

VOX COM AGC

VOX DUP TON

1/4

BRK

AGC

1/4 AGC

(SSB)

(SSB/AM)

(CW)

(RTTY)

(in memory mode)

(CW)

(RTTY)

(FM/WFM)

BAND scope

Multi function meter

SWR meter

VO MET VSC

VO KEY MET VSC

VO DEC MET VSC

VO DTM MET VSC

SCN PRI

SEL

V/M VSC

MW MPW MPR

BAND

scope

Multi function

meter

VOX AGC

TBW

9600

(AM)

Push

[AF]

momentarily

Set mode menu

Push

momentarily

Push

for 1 sec.

Push

[Z(MENU/GRP)]

to exit

152

MENU GUIDE

• Set mode menu

• Display set mode

• Time set mode

• Miscellaneous (others) set mode

Quick set mode

No.

1 RF Power RF Power RF Power

2 MIC Gain Key Speed

Twin Peak

Filter

SSB TBW

(WIDE) L

SSB TBW

(WIDE) H

Side Tone

Level

SSB TBW

(MID) L

Side Tone

Level Limit

RTTY Mark

Frequency

RTTY Shift

Width

RTTY Keying

Polarity

SSB TBW

(MID) H

SSB TBW

(NAR) L

SSB TBW

(NAR) H

CW Pitch

SSB

mode

RTTY

mode

RF Power

MIC Gain

AM/FM

mode

Set mode description

Push [Z(MENU/GRP)] or [AF] switch

to return to upper menu

153

ABOUT CE

INSTALLATION NOTES

For amateur base station installations it is recom-

mended that the forwards clearance in front of the an-

tenna array is calculated relative to the EIRP (Effective

Isotropic Radiated Power). The clearance height below

the antenna array can be determined in most cases

from the RF power at the antenna input terminals.

As different exposure limits have been recommended

for different frequencies, a relative table shows a

guideline for installation considerations.

Below 30 MHz, the recommended limits are speciﬁed

in terms of V/m or A/m ﬁelds as they are likely to fall

within the near-ﬁeld region. Similarly, the antenna may

be physically short in terms of electrical length and that

the installation will require some antenna matching de-

vice which can create local, high intensity magnetic

ﬁelds. Analysis of such MF installations is best consid-

ered in association with published guidance notes

such as the FCC OET Bulletin 65 Edition 97-01 and its

annexes relative to amateur transmitter installations.

The EC recommended limits are almost identical to the

FCC speciﬁed ‘uncontrolled’ limits and tables exist that

show pre-calculated safe distances for different an-

tenna types for different frequency bands. Further in-

formation can be found at http://www.arrl.org/.

•Typical amateur radio installation

Exposure distance assumes that the predominant ra-

diation pattern is forwards and that radiation vertically

downwards is at unity gain (sidelobe suppression is

equal to main lobe gain). This is true of almost every

gain antenna today. Exposed persons are assumed to

be beneath the antenna array and have a typical

height to 1.8 m.

The ﬁgures assume the worst case emission of con-

stant carrier.

For the bands 10 MHz and higher the following power

density limits have been recommended:

10–400 MHz 2 W/sq m

435 MHz 2.2 W/sq m

EIRP clearance heights by frequency band

Watts 10–2 m 70 cm 23 cm

13cm and above

1 2.1 m 2 m 2 m 2 m

10 2.8 m 2.7 m 2.5 m 2.3 m

25 3.4 m 3.3 m 2.7 m 2.5 m

100 5 m 4.7 m 3.6 m 3.2 m

1000 12 m 11.5 m 7.3 m 6.3 m

Forward clearance, EIRP by frequency band

Watts 10–2 m 70 cm 23 cm

13cm and above

100 2 m 2 m 1.1 m 0.7 m

1,000 6.5 m 6 m 3.5 m 3 m

10,000 20 m 18 m 11 m 7 m

100,000 65 m 60 m 35 m 29 m

In all cases any possible risk depends on the transmit-

ter being activated for long periods. (actual recom-

mendation limits are speciﬁed as an average during 6

minutes) Normally the transmitter is not active for long

periods of time. Some radio licenses will require that a

timer circuit automatically cuts the transmitter after 1–2

minutes etc.

Similarly some types of transmitter, SSB, CW, AM etc.

have a lower ‘average’ output power and the assessed

risk is even lower.

Versions of the IC-7000 which display the

“CE” symbol on the serial number seal,

comply with the essential requirements of

the European Radio and Telecommunication

Terminal Directive 1999/5/EC.

This warning symbol indicates that this

equipment operates in non-harmonised fre-

quency bands and/or may be subject to li-

censing conditions in the country of use. Be

sure to check that you have the correct ver-

sion of this radio or the correct programming

of this radio, to comply with national licens-

ing requirement.

154

ABOUT CE

DECLARATION

OF CONFORMITY

Kind of equipment: HF/VHF/UHF ALL MODE TRANSCEIVER

Type-designation: i7000

Version (where applicable):

This compliance is based on conformity with the following harmonised

standards, speciﬁcations or documents:

i) EN 301 489-1 v 1.4.1 (2002-08)

ii) EN 301 489-15 v 1.2.1 (2002-08)

iii) EN 301 783 v 1.1.1 (2000-09)

iv) EN 60950-1 (2001): A11: 2004

v) a

Düsseldorf 21st Nov. 2005

Place and date of issue

Icom (Europe) GmbH

Himmelgeister straße 100

D-40225 Düsseldorf

Authorized representative name

IKegami

General Manager

Signature

Declare on our sole responsibility that this equipment complies with the

essential requirements of the Radio and Telecommunications Terminal

Equipment Directive, 1995/5/EC, and that any applicable Essential Test

Suite measurements have been performed.

We Icom Inc. Japan

1-1-32, Kamiminami, Hirano-ku

Osaka 547-0003, Japan

•Version and frequency coverage

Europe (#02)

Receive

0.500–29.999999 MHz

50.000–54.000000 MHz

144.000–146.00000 MHz

430.000–440.00000 MHz

Transmit

1.810– 1.999999 MHz

3.500– 3.800000 MHz

7.000– 7.100000 MHz

10.100–10.150000 MHz

14.000–14.350000 MHz

18.068–18.168000 MHz

21.000–21.450000 MHz

24.890–24.990000 MHz

28.000–29.700000 MHz

50.000–52.000000 MHz

144.000–146.00000 MHz

430.000–440.00000 MHz

Spain (#04)

Receive

1.830– 1.850000 MHz

3.500– 3.800000 MHz

7.000– 7.100000 MHz

10.100–10.150000 MHz

14.000–14.350000 MHz

18.068–18.168000 MHz

21.000–21.450000 MHz

24.890–24.990000 MHz

28.000–29.700000 MHz

50.000–51.000000 MHz

144.000–146.00000 MHz

430.000–440.00000 MHz

Transmit

1.830– 1.850000 MHz

3.500– 3.800000 MHz

7.000– 7.100000 MHz

10.100–10.150000 MHz

14.000–14.350000 MHz

18.068–18.168000 MHz

21.000–21.450000 MHz

24.890–24.990000 MHz

28.000–29.700000 MHz

50.000–51.000000 MHz

144.000–146.00000 MHz

430.000–440.00000 MHz

Italy (#09)

Receive

1.830– 1.850000 MHz

3.500– 3.800000 MHz

7.000– 7.100000 MHz

10.100–10.150000 MHz

14.000–14.350000 MHz

18.068–18.168000 MHz

21.000–21.450000 MHz

24.890–24.990000 MHz

28.000–29.700000 MHz

50.000–51.000000 MHz

144.000–146.00000 MHz

430.000–434.00000 MHz

435.000–438.00000 MHz

Transmit

1.830– 1.850000 MHz

3.500– 3.800000 MHz

7.000– 7.100000 MHz

10.100–10.150000 MHz

14.000–14.350000 MHz

18.068–18.168000 MHz

21.000–21.450000 MHz

24.890–24.990000 MHz

28.000–29.700000 MHz

50.000–50.200000 MHz

144.000–146.00000 MHz

430.000–434.00000 MHz

435.000–438.00000 MHz

UK (#10)

Receive

0.500–29.999999 MHz

50.000–54.000000 MHz

144.000–146.00000 MHz

430.000–440.00000 MHz

Transmit

1.810– 1.999999 MHz

3.500– 3.800000 MHz

7.000– 7.200000 MHz

10.100–10.150000 MHz

14.000–14.350000 MHz

18.068–18.168000 MHz

21.000–21.450000 MHz

24.890–24.990000 MHz

28.000–29.700000 MHz

50.000–52.000000 MHz

144.000–146.00000 MHz

430.000–440.00000 MHz

France (#03)

Receive

0.500–29.999999 MHz

50.000–54.000000 MHz

144.000–146.00000 MHz

430.000–440.00000 MHz

Transmit

1.810– 1.850000 MHz

3.500– 3.800000 MHz

7.000– 7.100000 MHz

10.100–10.150000 MHz

14.000–14.350000 MHz

18.068–18.168000 MHz

21.000–21.450000 MHz

24.890–24.990000 MHz

28.000–29.700000 MHz

50.200–51.200000 MHz

144.000–146.00000 MHz

430.000–440.00000 MHz

155

MEMO

156

MEMO

IC-7000

#02

(Europe)

IC-7000

#03

(France)

IC-7000

#04

(Spain)

IC-7000

#09

(Italy)

IC-7000

#10

(UK)

1-1-32 Kamiminami, Hirano-ku, Osaka 547-0003, Japan

A-6478H-1EX-q

Printed in Japan

■ GER ■■ FRA ■■ ESP ■ SWE

■ AUT ■ NED ■ POR ■ DEN

■■ GBR ■ BEL ■ ITA ■ FIN

■ IRL ■ LUX ■■ GRE■■ SUI

■■ NOR

■■ GER ■ FRA ■■ ESP ■■ SWE

■■ AUT ■■ NED ■■ POR■■ DEN

■■ GBR ■■ BEL ■■ ITA ■■ FIN

■■ IRL ■■ LUX ■■ GRE■■ SUI

■■ NOR

■■ GER ■■ FRA ■ ESP ■■ SWE

■■ AUT ■■ NED ■■ POR■■ DEN

■■ GBR ■■ BEL ■■ ITA ■■ FIN

■■ IRL ■■ LUX ■■ GRE■■ SUI

■■ NOR

■■ GER ■■ FRA ■■ ESP ■■ SWE

■■ AUT ■■ NED ■■ POR■■ DEN

■■ GBR ■■ BEL ■ ITA ■■ FIN

■■ IRL ■■ LUX ■■ GRE■■ SUI

■■ NOR

■■ GER ■■ FRA ■■ ESP ■■ SWE

■■ AUT ■■ NED ■■ POR■■ DEN

■ GBR ■■ BEL ■■ ITA ■■ FIN

■■ IRL ■■ LUX ■■ GRE■■ SUI

■■ NOR

Report abuse

Libble takes abuse of its services very seriously. We're committed to dealing with such abuse according to the laws in your country of residence. When you submit a report, we'll investigate it and take the appropriate action. We'll get back to you only if we require additional details or have more information to share.

Product:

Forumrules

To achieve meaningful questions, we apply the following rules:

First, read the manual;
Check if your question has been asked previously;
Try to ask your question as clearly as possible;
Did you already try to solve the problem? Please mention this;
Is your problem solved by a visitor then let him/her know in this forum;
To give a response to a question or answer, do not use this form but click on the button 'reply to this question';
Your question will be posted here and emailed to our subscribers. Therefore, avoid filling in personal details.

new questions and answers
new manuals

You will receive an email to register for one or both of the options.

Get your user manual by e-mail

Enter your email address to receive the manual of Icom IC-7000 in the language / languages: English as an attachment in your email.

The manual is 4,25 mb in size.

You will receive the manual in your email within minutes. If you have not received an email, then probably have entered the wrong email address or your mailbox is too full. In addition, it may be that your ISP may have a maximum size for emails to receive.

The manual is sent by email. Check your email

If you have not received an email with the manual within fifteen minutes, it may be that you have a entered a wrong email address or that your ISP has set a maximum size to receive email that is smaller than the size of the manual.

The email address you have provided is not correct.

Please check the email address and correct it.

Your question is posted on this page

Would you like to receive an email when new answers and questions are posted? Please enter your email address.

Info

Icom IC-7000 Manual

Product: